User manual | ABB ACS800 Pump Control Application Program pump control Firmware Manual
Add to My manuals236 Pages
Below you will find brief information for pump control ACS800 Pump Control Application Program. This manual provides information on how to start up and control the drive. It also covers topics such as parameter settings, diagnostics, and fault tracing. The manual is written in a clear and concise way, with detailed explanations of all features. The manual is suitable for both experienced users and beginners.
advertisement
ACS800
Firmware Manual
ACS800 Pump Control Application Program 7.1 (+N687)
ACS800 Pump Control
Application Program 7.1
Firmware Manual
© 2006 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.
3AFE68478952 REV B
EN
EFFECTIVE: 07.04.2006
Table of contents
Table of contents
Introduction to this manual
Start-up; and control through the I/O
Control panel
Table of contents
5
6
Program features
Table of contents
7
Table of contents
8
Application macros
Actual signals and parameters
Table of contents
9
Fault tracing
Pump control application examples
Table of contents
10
Fieldbus control
Analogue extension module
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
Table of contents
11
Introduction to this manual
Chapter overview
This chapter includes a description of the contents of the manual. In addition, it contains information about the compatibility, safety, intended audience, and related publications.
Compatibility
This manual is compatible with the ACS800 Pump Control Application Program version 7.1 (firmware package version AHXR7150 – see parameter
Safety instructions
Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive.
• Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission, or use the drive. The complete safety instructions are given at the beginning of the
Hardware Manual.
• Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing the default settings of a function. For each function, the warnings and notes are given in this manual in the subsection describing the related user-adjustable parameters.
Reader
The reader of the manual is expected to know the standard electrical wiring practices, electronic components, and electrical schematic symbols.
Contents
The manual consists of the following chapters:
•
Start-up; and control through the I/O
instructs in setting up the application program, and how to start, stop and regulate the speed of the drive.
•
gives instructions for using the panel.
•
contains the feature descriptions and the reference lists of the
user settings and diagnostic signals.
•
contains a short description of each macro together with a
connection diagram.
•
describes the actual signals and parameters of the
drive.
•
lists the warning and fault messages with the possible causes and
remedies.
Introduction to this manual
12
•
describes the communication through the serial communication
links.
•
Pump control application examples
presents an existing two-pump PFC
application.
•
describes the communication between the drive and an RAIO analogue I/O extension module (optional).
•
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
contains more information on the
actual signals and parameters.
Related Publications
In addition to this manual, the ACS800 user documentation includes the following manuals:
• Hardware manuals
• Several user’s manuals for the optional devices for the ACS800.
Introduction to this manual
13
Start-up; and control through the I/O
Chapter overview
The chapter instructs how to:
• do the start-up
• start, stop, change the direction of rotation, and adjust the speed of the motor through the I/O interface
• perform an Identification Run for the drive.
How to start-up the drive
A step-by-step instruction for starting up the drive follows. Before you begin, ensure you have the motor nameplate data at hand.
Note: Before beginning the start-up, ensure that all active interlock inputs (if any) are
ON at the digital I/O terminals of the RMIO board of the drive. See the chapter
, parameter
SAFETY
The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.
The safety instructions must be followed during the start-up procedure. See the appropriate hardware manual for safety instructions.
Check the installation. See the installation checklist in the appropriate hardware/installation manual.
Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.
De-couple the driven machine if:
- there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or
- a Standard ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. (ID Run is essential only in applications which require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.)
POWER-UP
Apply mains power. The control panel first shows the panel identification data …
… then the Identification Display of the drive …
CDP312 PANEL Vx.xx
.......
ACS800 xx kW
ID NUMBER 1
… then the Actual Signal Display.
Drive set-up can now be started.
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
ACT VAL1 0.00 bar
CURRENT 0.00 A
FREQ 0.00 Hz
Start-up; and control through the I/O
14
MANUAL START-UP DATA ENTERING (parameter group 99)
Select the language. The general parameter setting procedure is described below.
The general parameter setting procedure:
- Press PAR to select the Parameter Mode of the panel.
- Press the double-arrow keys ( or ) to scroll the parameter groups.
- Press the arrow keys ( or ) to scroll parameters within a group.
- Activate the setting of a new value by ENTER.
- Change the value by the arrow keys ( or ), fast change by the doublearrow keys ( or ).
- Press ENTER to accept the new value (brackets disappear).
Select the Application Macro. The general parameter setting procedure is given above.
1 -> 0.0 Hz O
99 START-UP DATA
01 LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
1 -> 0.0 Hz O
99 START-UP DATA
01 LANGUAGE
[ENGLISH]
1 -> 0.0 Hz O
99 START-UP DATA
02 APPLICATION MACRO
[ ]
Select the motor control mode. The general parameter setting procedure is given above.
DTC is suitable in most cases. The SCALAR control mode is recommended
- for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the drive is variable
- when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal current of the inverter
- when the inverter is used for test purposes with no motor connected.
Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate:
3
V
690 Y
400 D
660 Y motor
Hz kW
50
50
50
30
30
30
M2AA 200 MLA 4
IEC 200 M/L 55 r/min
1475
1475
No
Ins.cl. F
A
32.5
56
IP 55 cos
IA/IN t E/s
0.83
0.83
1470 34 0.83
380 D
415 D
440 D
Cat. no
50
50
60
30
30
35
1470
1475
1770
59
54
59
3GAA 202 001 - ADA
0.83
0.83
0.83
6312/C3
ABB Motors
6210/C3
IEC 34-1
180
380 V mains voltage
1 -> 0.0 Hz O
99 START-UP DATA
04 MOTOR CTRL MODE
[DTC]
Note: Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate.
For example, if the motor nominal speed is 1440 rpm on the nameplate, setting the value of parameter
99.08 MOTOR NOM
SPEED to 1500 rpm results in the wrong operation of the drive.
- motor nominal voltage
Allowed range: 1/2 · U
N
…
2 · U
N of ACS800. (U
N
refers to the highest voltage in each of the nominal voltage ranges: 415 VAC for 400 VAC units, 500 VAC for 500
VAC units and 690 VAC for 600 VAC units.)
- motor nominal current
Allowed range: approx. 1/6 × I
2hd
…
2 × I
2hd of ACS800
1 -> 0.0 Hz O
99 START-UP DATA
05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE
[ ]
1 -> 0.0 Hz O
99 START-UP DATA
06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT
[ ]
Start-up; and control through the I/O
15
- motor nominal frequency
Range: 8
…
300 Hz
1 -> 0.0 Hz O
99 START-UP DATA
07 MOTOR NOM FREQ
[ ]
- motor nominal speed
Range: 1
…
18000 rpm
1 -> 0.0 Hz O
99 START-UP DATA
08 MOTOR NOM SPEED
[ ]
-motor nominal power
Range: 0
…
9000 kW
1 -> 0.0 Hz O
99 START-UP DATA
09 MOTOR NOM POWER
[ ]
When the motor data has been entered, a warning appears. It indicates that the motor parameters have been set, and the drive is ready to start the motor identification (ID Magnetisation or ID Run).
Select the motor identification method.
The default value NO (ID Magnetisation only) is sufficient for most applications. It is applied in this basic start-up procedure.
The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) should be selected instead if:
- The operation point is near zero speed, and/or
- Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required.
For more information, see the subsection How to perform the ID Run below.
1 -> 0.0 Hz O
** WARNING **
ID MAGN REQ
1 -> 0.0 Hz O
99 START-UP DATA
10 MOTOR ID RUN
[NO]
IDENTIFICATION MAGNETISATION (with Motor ID Run selection ID MAGN)
Press the LOC/REM key to change to local control (L shown on the first row).
Press the to start the Identification Magnetisation. The motor is magnetised at zero speed for 20 to 60 s. Two warnings are displayed:
The upper warning is displayed while the magnetisation is in progress.
The lower warning is displayed after the magnetisation is completed.
DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR
1 L-> 0.0 Hz I
** WARNING **
ID MAGN
1 L-> 0.0 Hz O
** WARNING **
ID DONE
Check the direction of rotation of the motor.
- Press ACT to get the status row visible.
- Increase the speed reference from zero to a small value by pressing REF and then the arrow keys ( , , or ).
- Press to start the motor.
- Check that the motor is running in the desired direction.
- Stop the motor by pressing .
1 L->[xxx] Hz I
ACT VAL1 xxx bar
CURRENT xx A
FREQ xx Hz
Start-up; and control through the I/O
16
To change the direction of rotation of the motor:
- Disconnect mains power from the drive, and wait 5 minutes for the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge. Measure the voltage between each input terminal (U1, V1 and W1) and earth with a multimeter to ensure that the frequency converter is discharged.
- Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors at the motor terminals or at the motor connection box.
- Verify your work by applying mains power and repeating the check as described above.
forward direction reverse direction
FREQUENCY LIMITS AND ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIMES
Set the minimum frequency.
1 L-> 0.0 Hz O
20 LIMITS
01 MINIMUM FREQ
[ ]
Set the maximum frequency.
1 L-> 0.0 Hz O
20 LIMITS
02 MAXIMUM FREQ
[ ]
Set the acceleration time 1.
Note: Also set acceleration time 2 if two acceleration times will be used in the application.
1 L-> 0.0 rpm O
22 ACCEL/DECEL
02 ACCEL TIME 1
[ ]
Set the deceleration time 1.
Note: Also set deceleration time 2 if two deceleration times will be used in the application.
1 L-> 0.0 rpm O
22 ACCEL/DECEL
03 DECEL TIME 1
[ ]
The drive is now ready for use.
Start-up; and control through the I/O
17
How to control the drive through the I/O interface
The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analogue inputs, when:
• the motor start-up is performed, and
• the default (PFC TRAD macro) parameter settings are valid.
PRELIMINARY SETTINGS
Ensure the PFC TRAD macro is active.
Ensure the control connections are wired according to the connection diagram given for the PFC TRAD macro.
Ensure the drive is in external control mode. Press the LOC/REM key to change between external and local control.
STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR
Start by switching digital input DI6 on.
1 -> 0.0 Hz I
ACT VAL1 0.00 bar
CURRENT 0.00 A
FREQ 0.00 Hz
Regulate the speed by adjusting the voltage of analogue input AI1.
In External control, there is no L visible on the first row of the panel display.
1 -> 45.0 Hz I
ACT VAL1 10.00 bar
CURRENT 80.00 A
FREQ 45.00 Hz
STOPPING THE MOTOR
Switch off digital input DI6.
1 -> 45.0 Hz O
ACT VAL1 0.00 bar
CURRENT 0.00 A
FREQ 0.00 Hz
Start-up; and control through the I/O
18
How to perform the ID Run
The drive performs the ID Magnetisation automatically at the first start. In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID Run. The ID Run (Standard or
Reduced) should be selected if:
• The operation point is near zero speed, and/or
• Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required.
The Reduced ID Run is to be performed instead of the Standard if it is not possible to disengage the driven machine from the motor.
ID Run Procedure
Note: If parameter values (Group 10 to 98) are changed before the ID Run, check that the new settings meet the following conditions:
• 20.01 MINIMUM FREQUENCY < 0 Hz.
• 20.02 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY > 80% of motor rated frequency
• 20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT > 100% · I hd
• 20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE > 50%
• Ensure that the panel is in the local control mode (L displayed on the status row).
Press the LOC/REM key to switch between modes.
• Change the ID Run selection to STANDARD or REDUCED.
1 L -> 45.0 Hz O
99 START-UP DATA
10 MOTOR ID RUN
[STANDARD]
• Press ENTER to verify selection. The following message will be displayed:
1 L -> 45.0 Hz O
ACS800 55 kW
**WARNING**
ID RUN SEL
• To start the ID Run, press the key. The Run Enable signal must be active
(see parameter 16.01 RUN ENABLE). With the PFC TRAD macro, the interlocks must be on (see parameter 81.20 INTERLOCKS).
Warning during the ID Run Warning when the ID Run is started
1 L -> 45.0 Hz I
ACS800 55 kW
**WARNING**
MOTOR STARTS
1 L -> 45.0 Hz I
ACS800 55 kW
**WARNING**
ID RUN
Warning after a successfully completed ID Run
1 L -> 45.0 Hz I
ACS800 55 kW
**WARNING**
ID DONE
Start-up; and control through the I/O
19
In general, it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID Run.
However:
• The Motor ID Run can be stopped at any time by pressing the control panel stop key ( ).
• After the ID Run is started with the start key ( ), it is possible to monitor the actual values by first pressing the ACT key and then a double-arrow key ( ).
Start-up; and control through the I/O
20
Start-up; and control through the I/O
Control panel
Chapter overview
The chapter describes how to use the control panel CDP 312R.
The same control panel is used with all ACS800 series drives, so the instructions given apply to all ACS800 types. The display examples shown are based on the
Standard Application Program; displays produced by other application programs may differ slightly.
Overview of the panel
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
ACT PAR FUNC DRIVE
ENTER
7
LOC
REM
I
4
6
RESET
0
5
3
REF
1
2
6
7
4
5
2
3
No.
1
The LCD type display has 4 lines of 20 characters.
The language is selected at start-up (parameter
The control panel has four operation modes:
- Actual Signal Display Mode (ACT key)
- Parameter Mode (PAR key)
- Function Mode (FUNC key)
- Drive Selection Mode (DRIVE key)
The use of single arrow keys, double arrow keys and ENTER depend on the operation mode of the panel.
The drive control keys are:
Use
Start
Stop
Activate reference setting
Forward direction of rotation
Reverse direction of rotation
Fault reset
Change between Local / Remote (external) control
21
Control panel
22
Panel operation mode keys and displays
The figure below shows the mode selection keys of the panel, and the basic operations and displays in each mode.
Actual Signal Display Mode
ACT
Act. signal / Fault history selection
Act. signal / Fault message scrolling
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
Enter selection mode
Accept new signal
ENTER
Parameter Mode
PAR
Group selection
Fast value change
Parameter selection
Slow value change
Enter change mode
Accept new value
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
10 START/STOP/DIR
01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR
DI1,2
Function Mode
ENTER
FUNC
Row selection
Page selection
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
ENTER
Drive Selection Mode
DRIVE
ENTER
Function start
Drive selection
ID number change
Enter change mode
Accept new value
ACS 800 75 kW
PFC Application
AHXR7110
ID NUMBER 1
Status row
Actual signal names and values
Status row
Parameter group
Parameter
Parameter value
Status row
List of functions
Device type
SW version / application version and ID number
Status row
The figure below describes the status row digits.
Drive ID number
Drive control status
L = Local control
R = Remote control
“ “ = External control
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
Direction of rotation
->
= Forward
<-
= Reverse
Drive reference
Drive status
I = Running
O = Stopped
“ “ = Run disabled
Control panel
23
Drive control with the panel
The user can control the drive with the panel as follows:
• start, stop, and change direction of the motor
• give the motor speed reference or torque reference
• give a process reference (when the process PID control is active)
• reset the fault and warning messages
• change between local and external drive control.
The panel can be used for control of the drive control always when the drive is under local control and the status row is visible on the display.
How to start, stop and change direction
Step Action
1.
To show the status row.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
To switch to local control.
(only if the drive is not under local control, i.e. there is no L on the first row of the display.)
To stop
To start
To change the direction to reverse.
To change the direction to forward.
ACT
FUNC
LOC
REM
I
0
PAR
Display
1 ->1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
1 L ->1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
1 L ->1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
1 L <-1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
1 L ->1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
Control panel
24
How to set speed reference
Step Action
1.
To show the status row.
2.
3.
To switch to local control.
(Only if the drive is not under local control, i.e. there is no L on the first row of the display.)
To enter the Reference Setting function.
ACT
FUNC
PAR
LOC
REM
REF
4.
5.
To change the reference.
(slow change)
(fast change)
To save the reference.
(The value is stored in the permanent memory; it is restored automatically after power switch-off.)
ENTER
Display
1 ->1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
1 L ->1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
1 L ->[1242.0 rpm]I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
1 L ->[1325.0 rpm]I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
1 L -> 1325.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
Control panel
Actual signal display mode
In the Actual Signal Display Mode, the user can:
• show three actual signals on the display at a time
• select the actual signals to display
• view the fault history
• reset the fault history.
The panel enters the Actual Signal Display Mode when the user presses the ACT key, or if he does not press any key within one minute.
How to select actual signals to the display
Step Action
1.
To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode.
2.
3.
4.
To select a row (a blinking cursor indicates the selected row).
To enter the actual signal selection function.
To select an actual signal.
To change the actual signal group.
ACT
ENTER
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
1 ACTUAL SIGNALS
04 CURRENT
80.00 A
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
1 ACTUAL SIGNALS
05 TORQUE 70.00 %
25
5.a
To accept the selection and to return to the Actual Signal
Display Mode.
5.b
To cancel the selection and keep the original selection.
The selected keypad mode is entered.
ENTER
ACT PAR
FUNC DRIVE
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
TORQUE 70.00 %
POWER 75.00 %
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
Control panel
26
2.
How to display the full name of the actual signals
Step Action
1.
To display the full name of the three actual signals.
To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode.
Hold
ACT
Release
ACT
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQUENCY
CURRENT
POWER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
How to view and reset the fault history
Note: The fault history cannot be reset if there are active faults or warnings.
Step Action
1.
To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode.
2.
3.
4.
To enter the Fault History Display.
To select the previous (UP) or the next fault/warning
(DOWN).
To clear the Fault History.
To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode.
ACT
RESET
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
1 LAST FAULT
+OVERCURRENT
6451 H 21 MIN 23 S
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
2 LAST FAULT
+OVERVOLTAGE
1121 H 1 MIN 23 S
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
2 LAST FAULT
H MIN S
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
Control panel
How to display and reset an active fault
WARNING! If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the drive will start immediately after fault reset. If the cause of the fault has not been removed, the drive will trip again.
Step
1.
Action
To display an active fault.
2.
To reset the fault.
Press Key
ACT
RESET
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm
ACS 801 75 kW
** FAULT **
ACS800 TEMP
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
About the fault history
The fault history restores information on the latest events (faults, warnings and resets) of the drive. The table below shows how the events are stored in the fault history.
27
Sign
A Fault History View
Name and code
Sequential number
(1 is the most recent event)
Poweron time
Event
Drive detects a fault and generates a fault message
User resets the fault message.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
2 LAST FAULT
+DC OVERVOLT (3210)
1121 H 1 MIN 23 S
Drive generates a warning message.
Drive deactivates the warning message.
Information on display
Sequential number of the event and
LAST FAULT text.
Name of the fault and a “+” sign in front of the name.
Total power-on time.
Sequential number of the event and
LAST FAULT text.
-RESET FAULT text.
Total power-on time.
Sequential number of the event and
LAST WARNING text.
Name of the warning and a “+” sign in front of the name.
Total power-on time.
Sequential number of the event and
LAST WARNING text.
Name of the warning and a “-” sign in front of the name.
Total power-on time.
Control panel
28
Parameter mode
In the Parameter Mode, the user can:
• view the parameter values
• change the parameter settings.
The panel enters the Parameter Mode when the user presses the PAR key.
How to select a parameter and change the value
Step Action
1.
To enter the Parameter Mode.
PAR
2.
3.
4.
5.
To select a group.
To select a parameter within a group.
To enter the parameter setting function.
To change the parameter value.
- (slow change for numbers and text)
- (fast change for numbers only)
ENTER
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
10 START/STOP/DIR
01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR
DI1,2
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
11 REFERENCE SELECT
01 KEYPAD REF SEL
REF1 (rpm)
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
AI1
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
[AI1]
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
[AI2]
6a.
To save the new value.
ENTER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
AI2
6b.
To cancel the new setting and keep the original value, press any of the mode selection keys.
The selected mode is entered.
ACT PAR
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
AI1
FUNC DRIVE
Control panel
Function mode
In the Function Mode, the user can:
• upload the drive parameter values and motor data from the drive to the panel.
• download group 1 to 97 parameter values from the panel to the drive.
1)
• adjust the contrast of the display.
The panel enters the Function Mode when the user presses the FUNC key.
29
1)
The parameter groups 98, 99 and the results of the motor identification are not included by default. The restriction prevents downloading of unsuitable motor data. In special cases it is , however, possible to download all. For more information, please contact your local ABB representative.
Control panel
30
How to upload data from a drive to the panel
Note:
• Upload before downloading.
• Ensure the program versions of the destination drive are the same as the
versions of the source drive, see parameters 33.01
and
.
• Before removing the panel from a drive, ensure the panel is in remote operating mode (change with the LOC/REM key).
• Stop the drive before downloading.
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
Before upload, repeat the following steps in each drive:
• Setup the motors.
• Activate the communication to the optional equipment. (See parameter group 98
.)
Before upload, do the following in the drive from which the copies are to be taken:
• Set the parameters in groups 10 to 97 as preferred.
• Proceed to the upload sequence (below).
Action
Enter the Function Mode.
Press Key
Enter the page that contains the upload, download and contrast functions.
Select the upload function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected function).
Enter the upload function.
FUNC
ENTER
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
5.
Switch to external control.
(No L on the first row of the display.)
LOC
REM
1 -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
6.
Disconnect the panel and reconnect it to the drive into which the data will be downloaded.
Control panel
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
How to download data from the panel to a drive
How to upload data from a drive to the panel
above.
Display Action
Connect the panel containing the uploaded data to the drive.
Ensure the drive is in local control (L shown on the first row of the display). If necessary, press the LOC/REM key to change to local control.
Press Key
LOC
REM
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
Enter the Function Mode.
Enter the page that contains the upload, download and contrast functions.
Select the download function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected function).
Start the download.
FUNC
ENTER
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
DOWNLOAD =>=>
31
Control panel
32
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.a
6.b
How to set the contrast of the display
Step Action
Enter the Function Mode.
Enter the page that contains the upload, download and contrast functions.
Select a function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected function).
Enter the contrast setting function.
Adjust the contrast.
Accept the selected value.
Cancel the new setting and retain the original value by pressing any of the mode selection keys.
The selected mode is entered.
FUNC
ENTER
ENTER
ACT
PAR
FUNC DRIVE
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
CONTRAST [4]
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm
CONTRAST [6]
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 6
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
Control panel
33
Drive selection mode
In normal use the features available in the Drive Selection Mode are not needed; the features are reserved for applications where several drives are connected to one panel link. (For more information, see the Installation and Start-up Guide for the
Panel Bus Connection Interface Module, NBCI, Code: 3AFY 58919748 [English]).
In the Drive Selection Mode, the user can:
• Select the drive with which the panel communicates through the panel link.
• Change the identification number of a drive connected to the panel link.
• View the status of the drives connected on the panel link.
The panel enters the Drive Selection Mode when the user presses the DRIVE key.
Each on-line station must have an individual identification number (ID). By default, the ID number of the drive is 1.
Note: The default ID number setting of the drive should not be changed unless the drive is to be connected to the panel link with other drives on-line.
How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number
Step Action
1.
To enter the Drive Selection Mode.
DRIVE
Display
ACS800 75 kW
PFC Application
AHXR715B
ID NUMBER 1
2.
To select the next drive/view.
The ID number of the station is changed by first pressing
ENTER (the brackets round the ID number appear) and then adjusting the value with arrow buttons. The new value is accepted with ENTER. The power of the drive must be switched off to validate its new ID number setting.
The status display of all devices connected to the Panel
Link is shown after the last individual station. If all stations do not fit on the display at once, press the double-arrow up to view the rest of them.
ACS800 75 kW
PFC Application
AHXR715B
ID NUMBER 1
1o
3.
To connect to the last displayed drive and to enter another mode, press one of the mode selection keys.
The selected mode is entered.
ACT
FUNC
PAR
Status Display Symbols: o
= Drive stopped, direction forward
= Drive running, direction reverse
F = Drive tripped on a fault
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
Control panel
34
Reading and entering packed boolean values on the display
Some actual values and parameters are packed boolean, i.e. each individual bit has a defined meaning (explained at the corresponding signal or parameter). On the control panel, packed boolean values are read and entered in hexadecimal format.
In this example, bits 1, 3 and 4 of the packed boolean value are ON:
Bit 15 Bit 0
Boolean 0000 0000 0001 1010
Hex 0 0 1 A
Control panel
35
Program features
Chapter overview
The chapter describes program features. For each feature, there is a list of related user settings, actual signals, and fault and warning messages.
Local control vs. external control
The drive can receive start, stop and direction commands and reference values from the control panel or through digital and analogue inputs. An optional fieldbus adapter enables control over an open fieldbus link. A PC equipped with DriveWindow
®
can also control the drive.
Local Control
ACS800
External Control
Control panel
DriveWindow
®
CH3
(DDCS)
Standard I/O
Fieldbus
Adapter
Optional I/O
Module
RDCO
Board
Slot 1
Slot 1 or Slot 2
CH0
(DDCS)
AF 100 Interface
(Advant fieldbus connection only)
Local control
The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in local control. L indicates local control on the panel display.
1 L ->1242 rpm I
The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local mode.
Program features
36
External control
When the drive is in external control, the commands are given through the standard
I/O terminals (digital and analogue inputs), optional I/O extension modules and/or the fieldbus interface. In addition, it is also possible to set the control panel as the source for the external control.
External control is indicated by a blank on the panel display or with an R in those special cases when the panel is defined as a source for external control.
1 ->1242 rpm I
External Control through the Input/
Output terminals, or through the fieldbus interfaces
1 R ->1242 rpm I
External Control by control panel
The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations, EXT1 or
EXT2. Depending on the user selection, either one is active at a time.
Settings
Panel key
LOC/REM
Parameter
Additional information
Selection between local and external control.
Selection between EXT1 and EXT2.
Start, stop, direction source for EXT1.
Reference source for EXT1.
Start, stop, direction source for EXT2.
Reference source for EXT2.
Activation of the optional I/O and serial communication.
Diagnostics
Actual signals
Additional information
EXT1 reference, EXT2 reference.
EXT1/EXT2 selection bit in a packed boolean word.
Program features
37
Block diagram: start, stop, direction source for EXT1
The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start, stop, and direction for external control location EXT1.
DI1 / Std IO
DI1
DI6 / Std IO
DI6
DI1 / DIO ext 1
DI2 / DIO ext 1
DI3 / DIO ext 1
DI1 / DIO ext 2
DI2 / DIO ext 2
DI3 / DIO ext 2
I/O Extensions
DI7 to DI12
Fieldbus adapter slot 1
CH0 / RDCO board
Standard ModBus Link
Control panel
Fb. selection
See the chapter
COMM.
MODULE
KEYPAD
DI1 / Std IO = Digital input DI1 on the standard I/O terminal block
DI1 / DIO ext 1 = Digital input DI1 on digital I/O extension module 1
Select
10.01
EXT1
Start/stop/ direction
Block diagram: reference source for EXT1
The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed reference of external control location EXT1.
AI1 / Std IO
AI2 / Std IO
AI3 / Std IO
AI1, AI2, AI3
Fieldbus adapter slot 1
CH0 / RDCO board
Standard ModBus Link
Control panel
Fb. selection
See the chapter
COMM.
MODULE
KEYPAD
AI1 / Std IO = Analogue input AI1 on the standard I/O terminal block
Select
11.03
EXT1
Reference
REF1 (rpm)
Program features
38
Reference types and processing
The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analogue input signal and control panel signals.
• The drive accepts a bipolar analogue speed reference. This feature allows both the speed and direction to be controlled with a single analogue input. The minimum signal is full speed reversed and the maximum signal is full speed forward.
• The drive can form a reference out of two analogue input signals by using mathematical functions: Addition, subtraction, multiplication, minimum selection, and maximum selection.
It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum speed limits.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
External reference source, type and scaling.
Operating limits.
Acceleration and deceleration ramps.
Reference supervision.
Diagnostics
Actual signal
Additional information
Values of external references.
The reference values in different stages of the reference processing chain.
Parameter
Active reference / reference loss through a relay output.
Reference value.
Program features
39
Programmable analogue inputs
The drive has three programmable analogue inputs: one voltage input (0/2 to 10 V or
-10 to 10 V) and two current inputs (0/4 to 20 mA). Each input can be inverted and filtered, and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted.
Update cycles in the Pump Control Application Program
Input
AI / standard
AI / extension
Cycle
12 ms
12 ms
Settings
Parameter
Group
Additional information
AI as a reference source.
Processing of the standard inputs.
Supervision of AI loss.
AI as a PI process control reference.
Pressure monitoring through AI.
Pressure measurement for flow calculation.
Level measurement through AI.
Activation of optional analogue inputs.
Optional AI signal type definition (bipolar or unipolar).
Optional AI signal type definition (bipolar or unipolar).
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Values of standard inputs.
Value of optional inputs.
Program features
40
Programmable analogue outputs
Two programmable current outputs (0/4 to 20 mA) are available as standard, and two further outputs can be added by using an optional analogue I/O extension module. Analogue output signals can be inverted and filtered.
The analogue output signals can be proportional to motor speed, process speed
(scaled motor speed), output frequency, output current, motor torque, motor power, etc.
It is possible to write a value to an analogue output through a serial communication link.
Update cycles in the Pump Control Application Program
Output
AO / standard
AO / extension
Cycle
24 ms
24 ms
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
AO value selection and processing (standard outputs).
Operation of an externally controlled AO in a communication break.
Supervision of the use of optional AO.
Optional AO value selection and processing.
Activation of optional I/O.
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Values of the standard outputs.
Values of the optional outputs.
Program features
41
Programmable digital inputs
The drive has six programmable digital inputs (DI1 to DI6) as standard. Six extra inputs (DI7 to DI12) are available if optional digital I/O extension modules are used.
Update cycles in the Pump Control Application Program
Input
DI / standard
DI / extension
Cycle
12 ms
12 ms
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
DI as start, stop, direction.
DI in reference selection.
DI in constant frequency selection.
DI as external Run Enable, fault reset or user macro change signal.
DI as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection signal.
DI as external fault source.
DI in motor overtemperature supervision function.
DI as sleep function activation signal (in PI process control).
Activation of the optional digital I/O extension modules.
Diagnostics
Actual value
Fault
Additional information
Values of the standard digital inputs.
Values of the optional digital inputs.
Communication loss to I/O.
Program features
42
Programmable relay outputs
As standard there are three programmable relay outputs. Four outputs can be added by using two optional digital I/O extension modules. By means of a parameter setting it is possible to choose which information to indicate through the relay output: ready, running, fault, warning, motor stall, etc.
It is possible to write a value to a relay output through a serial communication link.
Update cycles in the Pump Control Application Program
Output
RO / standard
RO / extension
Cycle
100 ms
100 ms
Settings
Parameter
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
RO value selections and operation times.
Operation of an externally controlled relay output on a communication break.
Activation of optional relay outputs.
Additional information
Standard relay output states.
Optional relay output states.
Program features
Actual signals
Several actual signals are available:
• Drive output frequency, current, voltage and power
• Motor speed and torque
• Mains voltage and intermediate circuit DC voltage
• Active control location (Local, EXT1 or EXT2)
• Reference values
• Drive temperature
• Operating time counter (h), kWh counter
• Digital I/O and Analogue I/O status
• PI controller actual values (if the PFC TRAD macro is selected)
• Calculated flow
• Level measurement
Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the control panel display. It is also possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the analogue outputs.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Selection of an actual signal to an analogue output.
Selection of an actual signal to a dataset (serial communication).
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Lists of actual signals.
43
Program features
44
Pump/Fan control
The PFC TRAD (Pump and fan control) application macro is specially designed for multimotor pumping (or compressor, etc.) stations. While directly controlling one motor, the drive is able to start additional, direct-on-line motors whenever a higher capacity is needed. There is an Autochange function to alternate between the pumps so all pumps have an equal duty time, and the Interlocks function enables the drive to detect if any of the pumps are unavailable (e.g. switched off for maintenance) so the next available pump is started instead.
Pump control application examples
, and the parameter groups listed
below.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Selection of digital outputs for starting and stopping of motors.
Process reference selection, set-up of auxiliary motor start/stop frequencies.
Set-up of auxiliary motors, start delays, Interlocks function and automatic motor alternation (Autochange function).
Set-up of PFC protections (pressure monitoring).
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Status of digital inputs.
Status of relay outputs.
Time since latest Autochange.
Program features
45
Process PI control
There is a built-in PI controller in the drive. The controller can be used to control process variables such as pressure, flow or fluid level.
When the process PI control is activated, a process reference (setpoint) is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference. An actual value (process feedback) is also brought back to the drive. The process PI control adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity (actual value) at the desired level (reference).
The block diagram below right illustrates the process PI control.
The figure on the left shows an application example: The controller adjusts the speed of a pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set pressure reference.
Example:
Pressure boost pump PI
A C S 6 0 0
ACS800
R E M
R E S E T
F U N C D R I V E
E N T E R
0 . . . 1 0 b a r
4 . . . 2 0 m A
PI Control Block Diagram
%ref
40.04
..
.
40.15
AI1
AI2
AI3
Process
Actual Values
40.01
40.02
40.03
PImax
PImin
Switch
99.04 = 0
(DTC)
Frequency reference
Speed reference
%ref = external reference EXT REF2 (see parameter
Settings
Parameter
Purpose
Application macro selection.
The settings of the process PI controller.
The supervision limits for the process reference REF2 and the variables
ACT1 and ACT2.
Diagnostics
Actual Signals
and
Purpose
PI process controller reference, actual values and error value.
Supervision limit exceeded indication through a relay output.
PI process controller values through standard analogue outputs.
Program features
46
Sleep function for process PI control
The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable/disable logic.
Motor frequency
Compare
2
1
1<2
Process actual value
(selected by
DI1
...
&
Compare
1
2
1<2
DI1
...
Select
OFF
INTERNAL
DI
AND
43.01
OFF
INTERNAL
DI
AND
&
%refActive
PFCActive modulating
03.02 (b1)
03.02 (b2)
Select
43.01
AND
&
Delay t
Or
<1
Delay
StartRq t
43.02
Or
<1
43.06
Set/Reset
S
R
S/R
Motor freq.: Drive output frequency
%refActive: The % reference (EXT REF2) is in use. See Parameter
modulating: The inverter IGBT control is operating
1 = Activate sleeping
0 = Deactivate sleeping
Example: Sleep function for a PI controlled pressure boost pump
Water consumption falls at night. As a consequence, the PI process controller decreases the motor speed. However, due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds, the motor does not stop but keeps rotating. The sleep function detects the slow rotation, and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed. The drive shifts into sleep mode, still monitoring the pressure. The pumping restarts when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum level and the wake-up delay has passed.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Application macro activation (MULTIMASTER or PFC TRAD).
Sleep function settings.
Diagnostics
Warning SLEEP MODE on the panel display.
Program features
47
Multipump control
The Multipump macro is designed for pumping stations that consist of multiple pumps, each controlled by a separate drive. The drives can be connected so that in case of a pump failure or maintenance action on one drive, the remaining drives continue operation.
The following diagram illustrates the Multipump logic.
EXT REF2
(see par.
Process
Actual
Values
PI
Switch
Speed ref.
= DTC
to
Start/Stop
Pumps
(increase no. of pumps)
Limiter
(increase no. of pumps)
(decrease no. of pumps)
(min)
(decrease no. of pumps)
Pump System
Manager priority x priority y
Drive 1
Drive 2
• • •
Drive 8
Start; Change to master; Master speed
Master enable;
…
For more information, see the chapter
Settings
Parameter
Purpose
Application macro selection.
Motor control mode selection (must be set to
Settings for the Multipump macro.
Program features
48
Level control
The Level control macro is designed for controlling a station of 1 to 8 pumps that is used for either emptying or filling a container. A fluid level sensor is connected to an analogue input. The measurement is used to start one or more pumps whenever necessary.
The following diagram illustrates the Level control logic.
NOT SEL
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI5
AI6
Select
Actual level
Group
Start/Stop
Pumps (increase no.
of pumps)
(decrease no. of pumps)
Limiter
(min)
(increase no. of pumps)
(decrease no. of pumps)
Pump System
Manager priority x
priority y
Efficiency or
High level speed
(to drives)
Start; Change to master; Master speed
Ready; Running;
Master enable;
…
Drive 1
Drive 2
• • •
Drive 8
Settings
Parameter
Purpose
Application macro selection.
Settings for the Level control macro.
Settings for Multipump control.
Program features
49
Flow calculation
The application program contains a function that enables reasonably accurate
(approximately ±5…10%) calculation of flow without the installation of a separate flow meter. The flow is calculated on the basis of parameter data such as pump inlet and outlet diameters, height difference of pressure sensors, and pump characteristics.
Note: The flow calculation function is not to be used for invoicing purposes.
Note: The flow calculation function cannot be used outside the normal operating range of the pump.
Settings
Parameter
Purpose
Settings for the flow calculation function.
Diagnostics
Actual Signals
and
Purpose
Flow counters
Difference between selected inlet and outlet pressures
Anti-jam function
The Anti-jam function can be used for preventing solids from building up on pump impellers. The Anti-jam procedure consists of a programmable sequence of forward and reverse runs of the pump, effectively shaking off any residue on the impeller.
This is especially useful with booster and wastewater pumps.
The function can be timed to occur at a suitable time without interrupting the pumping duty cycle.
Settings
Parameter
Purpose
Settings for the Anti-jam function.
Program features
50
Motor identification
The performance of Direct Torque Control is based on an accurate motor model determined during the motor start-up.
A motor Identification Magnetisation is automatically done the first time the start command is given. During this first start-up, the motor is magnetised at zero speed for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created. This identification method is suitable for most applications.
In demanding applications, a separate Identification Run can be performed.
Settings
Parameter
Power loss ride-through
If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilising the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue the operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed.
T
M
(Nm)
160
f
out
(Hz)
80
U
DC
(V d.c.)
520
120 60 390
80 40 260
40 20 130
f
U
mains
U
DC out
T
M
t(s)
1.6
4.8
8 11.2
14.4
U
DC
T
M
= Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, f
= Motor torque out
= output frequency of the drive,
Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (f out
= 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the mains is switched off. The drive runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy.
Note: Cabinet assembled units equipped with main contactor option have a “hold circuit” that keeps the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break.
The allowed duration of the break is adjustable. The factory setting is 5 seconds.
Program features
51
Automatic Start
Since the drive can detect the state of the motor within a few milliseconds, the starting is immediate under all conditions. There is no restart delay. E.g. the starting of turbining pumps or windmilling fans is easy.
Settings
Parameter
DC Magnetising
When DC Magnetising is activated, the drive automatically magnetises the motor before starting. This feature guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque, up to 200% of motor nominal torque. By adjusting the premagnetising time, it is possible to synchronise the motor start and e.g. a mechanical brake release. The Automatic
Start feature and DC Magnetising cannot be activated at the same time.
Settings
Parameters
and
Program features
52
Flux Braking
The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetisation in the motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during braking can be converted to motor thermal energy. This feature is useful in motor power ranges below 15 kW.
Motor
Speed
Flux Braking
No Flux Braking
t (s)
T
Br
T
N
(%)
60
T
T
Br
N
= Braking Torque
= 100 Nm
40
Flux Braking
20
No Flux Braking
f (Hz)
50 HZ/60 Hz
Rated Motor Power
3
4
5
1
2
2.2 kW
15 kW
37 kW
75 kW
250 kW
Braking Torque (%)
120
1
80
40
0
120
5
2
4
3
5
80
1
10
40
0
5
3
4
5
2
10
No Flux Braking
20
Flux Braking
20
30
30
40
40
50
f (Hz)
50
f (Hz)
The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during Flux Braking.
Therefore, Flux Braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the speed. The other benefits of Flux Braking are:
• The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking.
• The cooling of the motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor increases during the Flux Braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more efficiently than the rotor.
Settings
Parameter
Program features
53
Flux Optimisation
Flux Optimisation reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and the drive) can be improved by 1% to 10%, depending on the load torque and speed.
Settings
Parameter
Acceleration and deceleration ramps
Two user-selectable acceleration and deceleration ramps are available. It is possible to adjust the acceleration/deceleration times and the ramp shape. Switching between the two ramps can be controlled via a digital input.
The available ramp shape alternatives are Linear and S-curve.
Linear: Suitable for drives requiring steady or slow acceleration/deceleration.
Motor speed
S-curve: Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing the speed.
Linear
S-curve
Settings
Parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL .
2 t (s)
Critical frequencies
A critical frequencies function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor frequencies or frequency bands because of e.g. mechanical resonance problems.
Settings
Parameter group 25 CRITICAL FREQ .
Constant frequencies
It is possible to predefine three constant frequencies. Constant frequencies are selectable through digital inputs. Constant frequency activation overrides the drive frequency reference.
Settings
Parameter group 12 CONSTANT FREQ
.
Program features
54
Speed controller tuning
During the motor identification, the speed controller is automatically tuned. It is, however, possible to manually adjust the controller gain, integration time and derivation time, or let the drive perform a separate speed controller Autotune Run. In
Autotune Run, the speed controller is tuned based on the load and inertia of the motor and the machine. The figure below shows speed responses at a speed reference step (typically, 1 to 20%).
n n
N
%
A
B
C D
A : Undercompensated
B : Normally tuned (autotuning)
C : Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with B
D : Overcompensated speed controller
t
The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller. The controller output is the reference for the torque controller.
Derivative acceleration compensation
Speed reference
+
-
Error value
Proportional, integral
+
+
+
Torque reference
Derivative
Calculated actual speed
Settings
.
Diagnostics
Actual signal
.
Program features
55
Speed control performance figures
The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control when Direct
Torque Control is used.
Speed Control
Static speed error,
% of n
N
Dynamic speed error
No Pulse
Encoder
+ 0.1 to 0.5 %
(10% of nominal slip)
0.4 %sec.*
With Pulse
Encoder
+ 0.01 %
0.1 %sec.*
*Dynamic speed error depends on speed controller tuning.
T
T
N
(%)
100
T
load
n
act
-n
ref
n
N
T
N
n
N
= rated motor torque
= rated motor speed
n
act
n
ref
= actual speed
= speed reference
t (s)
0.1 - 0.4 %sec
Torque control performance figures
The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the motor shaft. The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control, when Direct Torque Control is used.
T
T
N
(%)
Torque Control No Pulse
Encoder
Linearity error
Repeatability error
+ 4 %*
+ 3 %*
Torque rise time 1 to 5 ms
With Pulse
Encoder
+ 3 %
+ 1 %
1 to 5 ms
100
90
T
ref
T
act
*When operated around zero frequency, the error may be greater.
10
< 5 ms
T
N
= rated motor torque
T
ref
= torque reference
T
act
= actual torque
t(s)
Program features
56
Scalar control
It is possible to select Scalar Control as the motor control method instead of Direct
Torque Control (DTC). In the Scalar Control mode, the drive is controlled with a frequency reference. The outstanding performance of the default motor control method, Direct Torque Control, is not achieved in Scalar Control.
It is recommended to activate the Scalar Control mode in the following special applications:
• In multimotor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 2) if the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after the motor identification
• If the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of the drive
• If the drive is used without a motor connected (e.g. for test purposes)
• The drive runs a medium voltage motor via a step-up transformer.
In the Scalar Control mode, some standard features are not available.
Settings
Parameter
IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive
IR Compensation is active only when the motor control mode is Scalar (see the section
above). When IR Compensation is
activated, the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds. IR Compensation is useful in applications that require high breakaway torque. In Direct Torque Control, no IR
Compensation is possible/needed.
Motor Voltage
IR Compensation
No compensation
Settings
Parameter
f (Hz)
Program features
57
Hexagonal motor flux
Typically the drive controls the motor flux in such a way that the rotating flux vector follows a circular pattern. This is ideal in most applications. When operated above the field weakening point (FWP, typically 50 or 60 Hz), it is, however, not possible to reach 100% of the output voltage. The peak load capacity of the drive is lower than with the full voltage.
If hexagonal flux control is selected, the motor flux is controlled along a circular pattern below the field weakening point, and along a hexagonal pattern in the field weakening range. The applied pattern is changed gradually as the frequency increases from 100% to 120% of the FWP. Using the hexagonal flux pattern, the maximum output voltage can be reached; The peak load capacity is higher than with the circular flux pattern but the continuous load capacity is lower in the frequency range of FWP to 1.6
×
FWP, due to increased losses.
Settings
Parameter
Programmable protection functions
AI<Min
AI<Min function defines the drive operation if an analogue input signal falls below the preset minimum limit.
Settings
Parameter
Panel Loss
Panel Loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as control location for the drive stops communicating.
Settings
Parameter
External Fault
External Faults can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source for an external fault indication signal.
Settings
Parameter
Program features
58
Motor Thermal Protection
The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor Thermal
Protection function and by selecting one of the motor thermal protection modes available.
The Motor Thermal Protection modes are based either on a motor temperature thermal model or on an overtemperature indication from a motor thermistor.
Motor temperature thermal model
The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions:
1) The motor is in the ambient temperature of 30
°
C when power is applied to the drive.
2) Motor temperature is calculated using either the user-adjustable or automatically calculated motor thermal time and motor load curve (see the figures below). The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30 °C.
Motor
Load
100%
Temp.
Rise
100%
63%
t
Motor
Current
(%)
150
100
50
Break point
Motor load curve
Zero speed load
Speed
Motor thermal time
t
Use of the motor thermistor
It is possible to detect motor overtemperature by connecting a motor thermistor
(PTC) between the +24 VDC voltage supply offered by the drive and digital input
DI6. In normal motor operation temperature, the thermistor resistance should be less than 1.5 kohm (current 5 mA). The drive stops the motor and gives a fault indication if the thermistor resistance exceeds 4 kohm
.
The installation must meet the regulations for protecting against contact.
Settings
Parameters
to
.
Program features
59
Pressure monitoring
The Pump Control application program contains protective functions for two-level analogue or single-level digital pressure monitoring of both the inlet and the outlet of the pump (or compressor, etc.).
In analogue monitoring, whenever the pressure being monitored meets the first limit, the drive indicates a warning, trips on a fault, or starts to follow a pre-set reference.
When the second limit is met, the drive either stops or produces a fault.
In digital pressure monitoring, one limit is observed. Whenever the limit is met, the drive indicates a warning, trips on a fault, or starts to follow a pre-set reference.
Settings
Parameter group 44 PFC PROTECTION .
Stall Protection
The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision limits (frequency, time) and choose how the drive reacts to the motor stall condition
(warning indication / fault indication & stop the drive / no reaction).
Settings
Parameters
.
Underload Protection
Loss of motor load may indicate a process malfunction. The drive provides an underload function to protect the machinery and process in such a serious fault condition. Supervision limits - underload curve and underload time - can be chosen as well as the action taken by the drive upon the underload condition (warning indication / fault indication & stop the drive / no reaction).
Settings
Parameters
.
Motor Phase Loss
The Phase Loss function monitors the status of the motor cable connection. The function is useful especially during the motor start: the drive detects if any of the motor phases is not connected and refuses to start. The Phase Loss function also supervises the motor connection status during normal operation.
Settings
Parameter
Program features
60
Earth Fault Protection
The Earth Fault Protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable.
The Earth Fault protection is based on earth leakage current measurement with a summation current transformer at the output of the converter.
• An earth fault in the mains does not activate the protection.
• In an earthed (grounded) supply, the protection activates in 200 microseconds.
• In floating mains, the mains capacitance should be 1 microfarad or more.
• The capacitive currents due to screened copper motor cables up to 300 metres do not activate the protection.
Settings
Parameter
Communication Fault
The Communication Fault function supervises the communication between the drive and an external control device (e.g. a fieldbus adapter module).
Settings
Parameters
to
.
Preprogrammed Faults
Overcurrent
The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 1.65 · I max type.
to 2.17 · I max
depending on drive
DC overvoltage
The DC overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 ·U
1max
V. For 690 V units, U
1max
, where U mains voltage range. For 400 V units, U
1max
1max
is the maximum value of the
is 415 V. For 500 V units, U
1max
is 500
is 690 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the mains voltage trip level is 728 VDC for 400 V units, 877 VDC for 500 V units, and 1210 VDC for 690 V units.
DC undervoltage
The DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.65 · U the mains voltage range. For 400 V and 500 V units, U
1min
U
1min
1min
, where U
1min
is the minimum value of
is 380 V. For 690 V units,
is 525 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the mains voltage trip level is 334 VDC for 400 V and 500 V units, and 461 VDC for 690
V units.
Drive temperature
The drive supervises the inverter module temperature. If the inverter module temperature exceeds 115 °C, a warning is given. The temperature trip level is
125 °C.
Program features
61
Short circuit
There are separate protection circuits for supervising the motor cable and the inverter short circuits. If a short circuit occurs, the drive will not start and a fault indication is given.
Input phase loss
Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the mains cable connection status by detecting intermediate circuit ripple. If a phase is lost, the ripple increases. The drive is stopped and a fault indication is given if the ripple exceeds 13%.
Ambient temperature
The drive will not start if the ambient temperature is below -5 to
0 °C or above 73 to 82 °C (the exact limits vary within the given ranges depending on drive type).
Overfrequency
If the drive output frequency exceeds the preset level, the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given. The preset level is 50 Hz over the operating range absolute maximum speed limit (Direct Torque Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar
Control active).
Internal fault
If the drive detects an internal fault the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given.
Operation limits
ACS800 has adjustable limits for speed, current (maximum), torque (maximum) and
DC voltage.
Settings
.
Power limit
The maximum allowed motor power is 1.5 · P hd
. If the limit is exceeded, the motor torque is automatically restricted. The function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload.
Program features
62
Automatic resets
The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage and “analogue input below a minimum” faults. The Automatic Resets must be activated by the user.
Settings
Parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET
.
Supervisions
The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the userdefined limits. The user may set limits for speed, current etc.
Settings
Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION .
Diagnostics
Actual Signals
Additional information
Supervision limit indicating bits in a packed boolean word.
Supervision limit indication through a relay output.
Parameter lock
The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock.
Settings
Parameters
and
.
Program features
63
Adaptive Programming using function blocks
Conventionally, the user can control the operation of the drive by parameters. Each parameter has a fixed set of choices or a setting range. The parameters make the programming easy, but the choices are limited. The user cannot customise the operation any further. The Adaptive Program makes freer customising possible without the need of a special programming tool or language:
• The program is built of standard function blocks included in the drive application program.
• The control panel is the programming tool.
• The user can document the program by drawing it on block diagram template sheets.
The maximum size of the Adaptive Program is 15 function blocks. The program may consist of several separate functions.
For more information, see Application Guide for Adaptive Program (code:
3AFE64527274 [English]).
Program features
64
Program features
65
Application macros
Chapter overview
This chapter describes the intended use, operation and the default control connections of the standard application macros. It also describes how to save a user macro, and how to recall it.
Overview of macros
Application macros are preprogrammed parameter sets. While starting up the drive, the user can select one of the macros by parameter
There are four standard macros and two user macros. The table below contains a summary of the macros and describes suitable applications.
Macro
Multipump
PFC TRAD
Level control
Hand/Auto
User
Suitable Applications
Pump station with up to 8 drives. At a time, one of the drives is master, the others are followers. The master status can be rotated throughout the drives.
Pump/fan/compressor station with one to five parallel pumps. One of the pumps is controlled by a drive, the others are direct-on-line and switched on and off by a relay system.
Control of fluid level in a tank.
Speed control applications. Switching between two external control devices is possible.
The user can save the customised standard macro i.e. the parameter settings including group 99, and the results of the motor identification into the permanent memory, and recall the data at a later time. Two user macros are essential when switching between two different motors is required.
Application macros
66
Multipump macro
The Multipump macro is designed for pumping stations that consist of multiple pumps, each controlled by a separate drive.
The configuration supports redundancy so that in case of a pump failure or maintenance action on one drive, the remaining drives continue operation. The drives communicate with each other through an NDBU-95 DDCS branching unit. (At the expense of redundancy, it is also possible to connect the drives in a ring without using a branching unit.) The external controller (PLC) is distributed to the digital and analogue inputs on multiple drives as shown below. It is also possible to distribute the analogue input values from two selected drives to the other drives via the fibre optic link (see parameter group
).
NDBU-95 DDCS Branching Unit
CH2
DI
AI
Drive 1
CH2
DI
AI
Drive 2
CH2
DI
AI
Drive 3
CH2
DI
AI
Drive 4
CH2
DI
AI
Drive 5
CH2
DI
AI
Drive 6
CH2
DI
AI
Drive 7
CH2
DI
AI
Drive 8 from PLC
The Multipump functionality is active when the Multipump macro (parameter
)
and external control location EXT2 (parameter group 10 START/STOP/DIR ) are
selected. The process reference can be either external or internal (parameter group
The Multipump macro has three modes selectable by a parameter.
In master-regulated operation, when the load increases, the master’s output frequency increases. After the master has reached full speed, other drives are started one by one so that the drive that was started last acts as the master. Follower drives are run either at a pre-set speed (i.e. at the optimal operating point of the pump) or at the same speed as the master. In both these modes, drives can be prioritised so that the one with the highest priority is the first to be started.
In direct follower operation, all drives run in synchronisation with the master. This mode can be used in time-critical applications or for testing of the pump installation.
An example connection diagram for a Multipump configuration is presented on page
Application macros
67
PFC TRAD macro
The PFC TRAD (“traditional” pump and fan control) macro can operate a pump (or fan or compressor) station with one to five parallel pumps. The control principle of a two-pump station is as follows:
• The motor of pump 1 is connected to the drive. The capacity of the pump is controlled by varying the motor speed.
• The motor of pump 2 is connected direct-on-line. The pump can be switched on and off by the drive when necessary.
• The process reference and actual value are fed to the PI controller included in the
PFC TRAD macro. The PI controller adjusts the speed (frequency) of pump 1 such that the process actual value follows the reference. When the frequency reference of the process PI controller exceeds the limit set by the user, the PFC
TRAD macro automatically starts pump 2. When the frequency falls below the limit set by the user, the PFC TRAD macro automatically stops pump 2.
• Using the digital inputs of the drive, an interlocking function can be implemented; the PFC TRAD macro detects if a pump is switched off and starts the other pump instead.
• The PFC TRAD macro makes automatic pump alternation possible (not in use in the example below) so both pumps have an equal duty time. For more information on the alternation system and other useful features such as the Sleep function,
Constant reference value, Reference steps and Regulator by-pass, see the chapter
(Groups 41 and 42).
By default, the drive receives process reference (setpoint) through analogue input
AI1, process actual value through analogue input AI2 and Start/Stop commands through digital input DI6. The interlocks are connected to digital input DI2 (Motor 1) and digital input DI3 (Motor 2).
The default output signals are given through analogue output AO1 (frequency) and
AO2 (actual value of the process PI controller). Relay outputs are used to control auxiliary motors.
If the Control Panel is in Local control mode (“L” visible on the first row of the display), the drive follows the frequency reference given from the Panel. The automatic PFC logic is bypassed: no process PI controller is in use and the directon-line motors are not started.
Application macros
68
Operation diagram
3 ~
Mains Supply
Input Power
Process Act. Value
Process Ref. Value
ACS800
PI
+24 V supply
DI3 (Interlock 2)
DI2 (Interlock 1)
RO2 RO1
Pump 1
On/Off
Pump 2
On/Off M
3~
Pump 1
Regulated speed
Pump 2
Direct-on-line
M
3~
+24 V DC ~230 V AC
1 L -> 45.0 Hz I
ACTUAL V 10.0 bar
FREQUENC 45.00 Hz
DI6-1 ST 1100010
Reference, Start/Stop, and Direction commands are given from the Control Panel.
To change to External, press LOC REM.
1 -> 45.0 Hz I
ACTUAL V 10.0 bar
FREQUENC 45.00 Hz
MOTOR SP 1350.0 rpm
Reference is read from analogue input AI2.
Start/Stop commands are given through digital input DI6.
Note: By default, automatic pump alternation is not in use.
Application macros
69
Default control connections
The figure below shows the external control connections for the PFC TRAD macro.
The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
See the wiring diagram on page
for sensor connection instructions.
PT
Hz
230 V AC
230 V AC
230 V AC
2
3
X26
1
X27
1
2
3
1
2
3
X23
1
2
X25
X20
1
2
X21
VREF
GND
Reference voltage -10 VDC
1 kohm < R
L
< 10 kohm
1
2
3
4
5
6
VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC
GND
AI1+
1 kohm < R
L
< 10 kohm
External reference 2 (process reference to PI
AI1-
AI2+
AI2controller). 0(2) … 10 V, R in
> 200 kohm
Actual value 1 (process actual value to PI controller). 0(4) … 20 mA, R in
= 100 ohm
7
8
12
AI3+
AI3-
AO2-
By default, not in use.
0(4) … 20 mA, R in
= 100 ohm.
9
10
AO1+ Frequency. 0(4) … 20 mA
=
AO1-
0 … motor nom. speed, R
L
< 700 ohm
11 AO2+ Actual 1 (PI controller actual value).
0(4) … 20 mA
=
2
3
X22
1 DI1
DI2
DI3
By default, not in use.
Interlock: motor 1 off/on
Interlock: motor 2 off/on
6
7
4
5
DI4
DI5
By default, not in use.
By default, not in use.
DI6 Stop/Start
+24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
8
9
+24 V
DGND1 Digital ground
10 DGND2 Digital ground
11 DI IL Start interlock (0 = stop)
+24 V
GND
RO11
RO12
RO13
RO21
RO22
RO23
RO31
RO32
RO33
Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated,
24 VDC, 250 mA
Relay output 1
M1 START
Relay output 2
M2 START
Relay output 3
FAULT
Application macros
70
Level control macro
The Level control macro is designed for controlling a station of 1 to 8 pumps that is used for either emptying or filling a container. A fluid level sensor is connected to an analogue input.
The Level control functionality is active when the Level control macro (parameter
) and external control location EXT2 (parameter group 10 START/STOP/DIR
) are selected. The process reference can be either external or internal (parameter group
41 PFC-CONTROL 1 ). The start levels for the pumps (as well as the warning
levels) are set by parameters in group 47 LEVEL CONTROL
.
At any time, one of the drives acts as master. The master status can be rotated throughout all the drives (using the Autochange function), or one drive can be a fixed master. The start/stop level settings of the master are the ones in effect.
The following drawing represents a station with three submersible pumps in emptying mode. Each pump has a pre-defined start level, and more pumps are started as the level in the container rises.
AI
DI
CH2
3
AI
DI
CH2
3
AI
DI
CH2
3
Overflow switch
Pumps at high speed + Warning
Pumps at high speed
Start level for pump 3
Start level for pump 2
Start level for pump 1
Level sensor
An example connection diagram is presented on page 188 .
Application macros
71
Hand/Auto macro
Start/Stop and Direction commands and reference settings can be given from one of two external control locations, EXT1 (Hand) or EXT2 (Auto). The Start/Stop/Direction commands of EXT1 (Hand) are connected to digital input DI1, and the reference signal is connected to analogue input AI1. The Start/Stop/Direction commands of
EXT2 (Auto) are connected to digital input DI6, and the reference signal is connected to analogue input AI2. The selection between EXT1 and EXT2 is dependent on the status of digital input DI5. The drive is frequency-controlled.
The frequency reference and Start/Stop and Direction commands can also be given from the control panel.
The frequency reference in Auto Control (EXT2) is given as a percentage of the maximum frequency of the drive.
Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks. The default signals on the display of the control panel are MOTOR SPEED FILT,
FREQUENCY and EXTERNAL REF 2.
Operation diagram
EXT1 (Hz) =
Hand Control
Hand/Auto
PLC or automation
EXT2 (%) =
Auto Control
Input
Power
M
3 ∼
Motor
Hz
A
Frequency
Current
Relay
Outputs
1 L -> 45.0 Hz I
MOTOR SP 1350.00 rpm
FREQUENC 45.00 Hz
EXTERNAL 15.5 %
Local control: Reference, Start/Stop commands are given from the Control Panel.
To change to External, press LOC REM.
1 -> 45.0 Hz I
MOTOR SP 1350.00 rpm
FREQUENC 45.00 Hz
EXTERNAL 15.5 %
External control (Hand): Reference is read from analogue input AI1. Start/Stop commands are given through digital input DI1.
Application macros
72
Default control connections
The figure below shows the external control connections for the Hand/Auto macro.
The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
Hz
A
Fault
2
3
X26
1
X27
1
2
3
1
2
3
X23
1
2
X25
X20
1
2
X21
VREF
GND
Reference voltage -10 VDC
1 kohm < R
L
< 10 kohm
1
2
3
4
5
6
VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC
GND
AI1+
1 kohm < R
L
< 10 kohm
External reference 1 (Hand control).
AI1-
AI2+
AI2-
0(2) … 10 V, R in
> 200 kohm
External reference 2 (Auto control).
0(4) … 20 mA, R in
= 100 ohm
7
8
12
AI3+
AI3-
AO2-
By default, not in use.
0(4) … 20 mA, R in
= 100 ohm.
9 AO1+ Motor frequency. 0(4) … 20 mA
=
10 AO1-
0 … motor nom. speed, R
L
< 700 ohm
11 AO2+ Motor current.
0(4) … 20 mA
=
2
3
X22
1 DI1
DI2
DI3
Stop/Start (EXT1)
By default, not in use.
By default, not in use.
6
7
4
5
DI4
DI5
By default, not in use.
EXT1 (Hand) / EXT2 (Auto) selection*
DI6 Stop/Start (Auto)
+24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
8
9
+24 V
DGND1 Digital ground
10 DGND2 Digital ground
11 DI IL Start interlock (0 = stop)
4)
+24 V
GND
RO11
RO12
RO13
RO21
RO22
RO23
RO31
RO32
RO33
Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated,
24 VDC, 250 mA
Relay output 1
READY
Relay output 2
RUNNING
Relay output 3
FAULT(-1)
Application macros
73
User macros
In addition to the standard application macros, it is possible to create two user macros. The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings including
Group 99, and the results of the motor identification into the permanent memory, and recall the data at a later time. The panel reference and the control location setting
(Local or Remote) are also saved.
To create User Macro 1:
• Adjust the parameters. Perform the motor identification if not performed yet.
• Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification by
to USER 1 SAVE (press ENTER). The storing takes approximately 20 to 60 seconds.
To recall the user macro:
• Change parameter
to USER 1 LOAD.
• Press ENTER to load.
The user macro can also be switched via digital inputs (see parameter
).
Note: User macro load restores also the motor settings in group 99 START-UP
DATA and the results of the motor identification. Check that the settings correspond
to the motor used.
Example: The user can switch the drive between two motors without having to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the motor is changed. The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor identification once for both motors and then to save the data as two user macros.
When the motor is changed, only the corresponding User macro needs to be loaded, and the drive is ready to operate.
Application macros
74
Application macros
75
Actual signals and parameters
Chapter overview
The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus equivalent values for each signal/parameter. More data is given in chapter
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
Terms and abbreviations
Term
Absolute Maximum
Frequency
Actual signal
FbEq
Parameter
Definition
Value of 20.02
, or 20.01 if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit.
Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can be monitored by the user. No user setting possible.
Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication.
A user-adjustable operation instruction of the drive.
Actual signals and parameters
76
No.
Name/Value
01 ACTUAL SIGNALS
Description
Basic signals for monitoring of the drive.
FbEq
01.02
01.04
01.05
01.06
MOTOR SPEED FILT Calculated motor speed in rpm.
01.03 FREQUENCY * ** *** **** Calculated drive output frequency.
MOTOR CURRENT
MOTOR TORQ FILT2
POWER
Measured motor current.
Calculated motor torque.
Motor power.
01.07
DC VOLTAGE
01.08
MAINS VOLTAGE
01.09
MOTOR VOLTAGE
Measured intermediate circuit voltage.
Calculated supply voltage.
Calculated motor voltage.
01.10
PP TEMPERATURE
01.11
EXTERNAL REF 1
01.12
EXTERNAL REF 2 ***
Temperature of the heatsink.
External reference REF1 in Hz.
01.13
CTRL LOCATION
External reference REF2. 100% corresponds to maximum process reference (PFC TRAD macro) or maximum frequency (Hand/Auto macro).
Active control location. (1,2) LOCAL; (3) EXT1; (4) EXT2. See the chapter
.
Elapsed time counter. Runs when the control board is powered.
01.14
TIME OF USAGE
01.15
KILOWATT HOURS kWh counter.
01.16
APPL BLOCK OUTPUT Application block output signal. E.g. PFC application output.
01.17
01.18
01.19
01.20
01.21
01.22
01.23
01.25
DI6-1 STATUS **
AI1 [V]
AI2 [mA]
AI3 [mA]
RO3-1 STATUS
AO1 [mA]
AO2 [mA]
01.24
ACTUAL VALUE 1 * **
***
ACTUAL VALUE 2
1 = 1 h
1 = 100 kWh
0 = 0%
10000 = 100%
Status of digital inputs DI6-DI1 and the optional PFC extension module digital input 1 (DI7). Example: 0000001 = DI1 is on, DI2 to DI7 are off.
Value of analogue input AI1.
Value of analogue input AI2.
Value of analogue input AI3.
Status of relay outputs RO3-RO1. Example: 0000110 = RO1 is de-energised, RO2 and RO3 are energised.
Value of analogue output AO1.
Value of analogue output AO2.
Value of process feedback signal no. 1 received by the process PI controller. See par. 40.12.
Value of process feedback signal no. 2 received by the process PI controller. See par. 40.14.
1 = 0.001 V
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 0.001 mA
0 = 0%
10000 = 100%
0 = 0%
10000 = 100%
-20000 =
-100%
20000 = 100% of motor abs. max. speed
-100 = -1 Hz
100 = 1 Hz
10 = 1 A
-10000 =
-100%
10000 = 100% of motor nom. torque
-1000 =
-100%
1000 = 100% of motor nom. power
1 = 1 V
1 = 1 V
1 = 1 V
1 = 1 °C
1 = 1 Hz
0 = 0%
10000 = 100%
*****
See Descr.
Actual signals and parameters
77
No.
01.27
Name/Value
01.28
EXT AO1 [mA]
01.29
EXT AO2 [mA]
01.30
01.31
01.32
01.33
01.37
01.38
01.39
01.40
01.41
01.42
01.45
01.47
ACTUAL FUNC OUT
PP 1 TEMP
PP 2 TEMP
PP 3 TEMP
PP 4 TEMP
MOTOR TEMP EST
AI5 [mA]
AI6 [mA]
DI7-12 STATUS
EXT RO STATUS
PFC OPERATION TIM
01.43
MOTOR RUN-TIME
01.44
FAN ON-TIME
CTRL BOARD TEMP
M/F STATE * ****
01.48
START COUNTER
02 ACTUAL SIGNALS
Description
01.26
CONTROL DEVIATION Deviation of the PI controller, i.e. the difference between the process reference value and the process actual value.
FbEq
-10000 =
-100%
10000 = 100%
100 = 1 Result of the arithmetic operation selected with par. 40.04
.
Value of output 1 of the analogue I/O extension module (optional).
Value of output 2 of the analogue I/O extension module (optional).
IGBT maximum temperature in inverter no. 1.
IGBT maximum temperature in inverter no. 2 (used only in high power units with parallel inverters).
IGBT maximum temperature in inverter no. 3 (used only in high power units with parallel inverters).
IGBT maximum temperature in inverter no. 4 (used only in high power units with parallel inverters).
Estimated motor temperature.
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 1 °C
1 = 1 °C
1 = 1 °C
1 = 1 °C
Value of analogue input AI5 read from AI1 of the analogue I/O extension module (optional). A voltage signal is also displayed in mA
(instead of V).
Value of analogue input AI6 read from AI2 of the analogue I/O extension module (optional).
A voltage signal is also displayed in mA
(instead of V).
Status of digital inputs DI7 to DI12 read from the digital I/O extension modules (optional). E.g. value 000001: DI7 is on, DI8 to DI12 are off.
Status of the relay outputs on the digital I/O extension modules
(optional). E.g. value 0000001: RO1 of module 1 is energised. Other relay outputs are de-energised.
Time since the latest Autochange. See parameter group 42.
1 = 1
1 = 1
1 = 1 h
Motor run time counter. The counter runs when the inverter modulates. 1 = 10 h
Running time of the drive cooling fan.
Note: The counter can be reset by the DriveWindow
®
PC tool.
Resetting is recommended when the fan is replaced.
1 = 10 h
Control board temperature.
State of drive (either Follower or Master). (0,1) FOLLOWER;
(2) MASTER.
Number of drive starts. Can be reset using parameter
Speed and torque reference monitoring signals.
1 = 1 °C
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 1 °C
See Descr.
1 = 1
02.01
SPEED REF 2
02.02
SPEED REF 3
02.09
TORQUE REF 2
Limited speed reference.
Ramped and shaped speed reference.
Speed controller output.
0 = 0%
20000 = 100% of motor abs. max. freq.
20000 = 100% of motor abs. max. freq.
0 = 0%
10000 = 100% of motor nominal torque
Actual signals and parameters
78
No.
Name/Value
02.10
TORQUE REF 3
Description
Torque reference.
FbEq
10000 = 100% of motor nominal torque
10000 = 100% 02.13
TORQ USED REF
02.17
SPEED ESTIMATED
Torque reference after frequency, voltage and torque limiters. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque.
Estimated motor speed. 100% corresponds to the Absolute Maximum
Frequency of the motor.
20000 = 100%
02.19
MOTOR ACCELERATIO Calculated motor acceleration from signal
03 INTERNAL DATA
Data words for monitoring of fieldbus communication (each signal is a
16-bit data word).
03.01
MAIN CONTROL WORD A 16-bit data word. See the chapter
03.02
MAIN STATUS WORD
03.03
AUX STATUS WORD
03.04
LIMIT WORD 1
03.05
FAULT WORD 1
03.20
FAULT CODE 1 LAST
A 16-bit data word. See the chapter
A 16-bit data word. See the chapter
A 16-bit data word. See the chapter
A 16-bit data word. See the chapter
03.06
FAULT WORD 2 A 16-bit data word. See the chapter
03.07
SYSTEM FAULT WORD A 16-bit data word. See the chapter
03.08
ALARM WORD 1
03.09
ALARM WORD 2
A 16-bit data word. See the chapter
A 16-bit data word. See the chapter
03.10
ALARM WORD 3
03.19
INT INIT FAULT
A 16-bit data word. See the chapter codes.
Fieldbus code of the latest fault. See chapter
for the
Fieldbus code of the latest fault. See chapter
for the codes.
Fieldbus code of the 2nd latest fault.
03.21
FAULT CODE 2 LAST
03.22
FAULT CODE 3 LAST
03.23
FAULT CODE 4 LAST
03.24
03.25
03.26
WARN CODE 2 LAST
03.27
WARN CODE 3 LAST
03.28
03.29
FAULT CODE 5 LAST
WARN CODE 1 LAST
WARN CODE 4 LAST
WARN CODE 5 LAST
Fieldbus code of the 3rd latest fault.
Fieldbus code of the 4th latest fault.
Fieldbus code of the 5th latest fault.
Fieldbus code of the latest warning.
Fieldbus code of the 2nd latest warning.
Fieldbus code of the 3rd latest warning.
Fieldbus code of the 4th latest warning.
Fieldbus code of the 5th latest warning.
03.30
LIMIT WORD INV
05 PFC WORDS
A 16-bit data word. See the chapter
Information on the PFC functionality.
05.01
PFC STATUS
05.02
PFC ALARM WORD
05.03
PFC FAULT WORD
05.04
PFC ACT REF
05.05
APPLIC REF AS Hz
05.06
AUX ON
05.07
WAKE UP ACT
A 16-bit data word. See the chapter
A 16-bit data word. See the chapter
A 16-bit data word. See the chapter
Final reference after reference steps, Sleep boost, and forced reference (parameter group 44) functions.
Process PI controller output in Hz.
Number of auxiliary/follower motors running.
Wake-up level (from Sleep mode).
1 = 1
Actual signals and parameters
79
No.
Name/Value
05.08
BOOST ACT
05.11
ACT FLOW
05.12
SUM FLOW
05.13
PRESSURE DEV
05.15
SHARE AI1
05.16
SHARE AI2
05.17
SHARE AI3
05.21
LC STATUS
05.23
ACT LEVEL ****
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS
09.01
AI1 SCALED
09.02
AI2 SCALED
09.03
AI3 SCALED
09.04
AI5 SCALED
09.05
AI6 SCALED
09.06
DS MCW
09.07
MASTER REF1
09.08
MASTER REF2
09.09
AUX DS VAL1
09.10
AUX DS VAL2
09.11
AUX DS VAL3
09.12
LCU ACT SIGNAL 1
09.13
LCU ACT SIGNAL 2
Description
Actual boosted reference.
Actual flow in m
3
/h as calculated by the drive. See parameter group 45
.
Total calculated flow in m
3
; stored when drive is powered off. Can be reset using parameter
.
FbEq
1 = 0.01%
1 = 1
1 = 1
Difference between inlet and outlet pressures. See parameter group
.
Shared analogue input AI1 value received through the fibre optic link.
See parameter group 65 SHARE IO
.
Shared analogue input AI1 value received through the fibre optic link.
See parameter group 65 SHARE IO
.
1 = 0.001 V
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 0.001 mA Shared analogue input AI1 value received through the fibre optic link.
See parameter group 65 SHARE IO
.
Level control status as a 16-bit data word. See the chapter
Measured fluid level for Level control in percent. The range 0…100% corresponds to the range of the analogue input selected for the level sensor (e.g. 4…20 mA). See parameter groups
Signals for the Adaptive Program.
1 = 1%
Value of analogue input AI1 scaled to an integer value.
Value of analogue input AI2 scaled to an integer value.
Value of analogue input AI3 scaled to an integer value.
Value of analogue input AI5 scaled to an integer value.
Value of analogue input AI6 scaled to an integer value.
Control Word (CW) of the Main Reference Data Set received from the master station through the fieldbus interface.
Reference 1 (REF1) of the Main Reference Data Set received from the master station through the fieldbus interface
Reference 2 (REF2) of the Main Reference Data Set received from the master station through the fieldbus interface
Reference 3 (REF3) of the Auxiliary Reference Data Set received from the master station through the fieldbus interface
Reference 4 (REF4) of the Auxiliary Reference Data Set received from the master station through the fieldbus interface
Reference 5 (REF5) of the Auxiliary Reference Data Set received from the master station through the fieldbus interface
Line-side converter signal selected by parameter 95.08
. A 16-bit data word.
Line-side converter signal selected by parameter 95.09
. A 16-bit data word.
20000 = 10 V
20000 =
20 mA
20000 =
20 mA
20000 =
20 mA
20000 =
20 mA
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
-32768 …
32767
-32768 …
32767
-32768 …
32767
-32768 …
32767
-32768 …
32767
Actual signals and parameters
80
No.
Name/Value Description
*Default signal for Multipump macro
**Default signal for PFC TRAD macro
***Default signal for Hand/Auto macro
****Default signal for Level Control macro
*****Of max. process reference (PFC TRAD macro) or max. frequency (Hand/Auto macro).
FbEq
Actual signals and parameters
81
Index Name/Selection
10 START/STOP/DIR
Description
The sources for external start, stop and direction control
10.01
EXT 1 STRT/STP/DI Defines the connections and the source of the start, stop and direction commands for external control location 1 (EXT1).
Notes:
• The pulse (P) start/stop commands are not available if either the Multipump or Level Control macro is selected.
• The pulse (P) start/stop commands are not available if motor interlocks
(parameter 42.04
) are ON.
NOT SEL No start, stop and direction command source.
DI1 Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop; 1 = start. Direction is fixed according to parameter 10.03
.
WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is on.
DI1,2
FbEq
Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop, 1 = start. Direction through digital input DI2. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control direction, parameter 10.03
DIRECTION must be REQUEST.
WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is on.
3
1
2
DI1P,2P
DI1P,2P,3
DI1P,2P,3P
DI6
DI6,5
KEYPAD
Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. Pulse stop through digital input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction of rotation is fixed according to parameter
10.03 DIRECTION.
Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. Pulse stop through digital input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction through digital input DI3. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control direction, parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be
REQUEST.
Pulse start forward through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start forward. Pulse start reverse through digital input DI2. 0 -> 1: Start reverse. Pulse stop through digital input DI3. 1 -> ”0”: stop. To control the direction, parameter 10.03
DIRECTION must be REQUEST.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1,2. DI6: Start/stop, DI5: direction.
Control panel. To control the direction, parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be
REQUEST.
COMM.MODULE
DI7
DI7,8
DI7P,8P
Fieldbus Control Word.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1,2.
See selection DI1P,2P.
DI7P,8P,9
DI7P,8P,9P
See selection DI1P,2P,3.
See selection DI1P,2P,3P.
EXT1STRT PTR Source selected by parameter 10.04
.
10.02
EXT 2 STRT/STP/DI Defines the connections and the source of the start, stop and direction commands for external control location 2 (EXT2).
Note: The pulse (P) start/stop commands are not available if motor interlocks
(parameter 42.04
) are ON.
Note: A pulse (P) start/stop source when either the Multipump or Level macro is active is not allowed.
4
5
6
7
8
9
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
Actual signals and parameters
82
Index Name/Selection
NOT SEL
DI1
DI1,2
DI1P,2P
DI1P,2P,3
DI1P,2P,3P
DI6
DI6,5
KEYPAD
COMM.MODULE
DI7
DI7,8
DI7P,8P
DI7P,8P,9
DI7P,8P,9P
EXT2STRT PTR
10.03
DIRECTION
FORWARD
REVERSE
REQUEST
10.04
EXT 1 STRT PTR
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
Description
See parameter 10.01
.
See parameter 10.01
.
See parameter 10.01
.
See parameter 10.01
.
See parameter 10.01
.
See parameter 10.01
.
See parameter 10.01
.
See parameter 10.01
.
See parameter 10.01
.
See parameter 10.01
.
See parameter 10.01
.
See parameter 10.01
.
See parameter 10.01
.
See parameter 10.01
.
See parameter 10.01
.
Source selected by parameter 10.05
.
Enables the control of direction of rotation of the motor, or fixes the direction.
Notes:
• With the PFC TRAD macro, if external reference 2 (EXT2) is the active reference, this parameter is fixed to FORWARD.
• The Anti-jam function can override this parameter. See parameter
Fixed to forward.
Fixed to reverse.
Direction of rotation control allowed.
Defines the source or constant for value EXT1STRT PTR of parameter 10.01
.
Parameter index or a constant value:
• Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs.
• Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value
C to enable the constant setting.
Defines the source or constant for value EXT2STRT PTR of parameter 10.02
.
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04
for information on the difference.
10.05
EXT 2 STRT PTR
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
11 REFERENCE
SELECT
Panel reference type, external control location selection and external reference sources and limits
11.02
EXT1/EXT2 SELECT Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal that selects between the two external control locations, EXT1 or EXT2.
EXT1 EXT1 active. The control signal sources are defined by parameter
11.03
.
10.01 and
EXT2 EXT2 active. The control signal sources are defined by parameter 10.02 and
11.06
.
DI1
DI2
DI3
Digital input DI1. 0 = EXT1, 1 = EXT2.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
-
-
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
15
16
5
6
3
4
FbEq
1
2
Actual signals and parameters
Index Name/Selection
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
Description
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
DI10
DI11
DI12
COMM.MODULE
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
Fieldbus Control Word, bit 11.
EXT1/2SELPTR Source selected by parameter 11.09
.
11.03
EXT REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1
KEYPAD
AI1
Control panel. The first line on the display shows the reference value.
Analogue input AI1.
AI2
AI3
AI1+AI3
AI2+AI3
AI1-AI3
AI2-AI3
AI1*AI3
AI2*AI3
MIN(AI1,3)
MIN(AI2,3)
Analogue input AI2.
Analogue input AI3.
Summation of analogue inputs AI1 and AI3.
Summation of analogue inputs AI2 and AI3.
Subtraction of analogue inputs AI1 and AI3.
Subtraction of analogue inputs AI2 and AI3.
Multiplication of analogue inputs AI1 and AI3.
Multiplication of analogue inputs AI2 and AI3.
MAX(AI1,3)
MAX(AI2,3)
COMM.MODULE
EXT1REF PTR
AI5
AI6
AI5+AI6
AI5-AI6
AI5*AI6
MIN(AI5,AI6)
Minimum of analogue inputs AI1 and AI3.
Minimum of analogue inputs AI2 and AI3.
Maximum of analogue inputs AI1 and AI3.
Maximum of analogue inputs AI2 and AI3.
Fieldbus reference REF1.
Source selected by parameter
Analogue input AI5.
Analogue input AI6.
11.10
.
Summation of analogue inputs AI5 and AI6.
Subtraction of analogue inputs AI5 and AI6.
Multiplication of analogue inputs AI5 and AI6.
Minimum of analogue inputs AI5 and AI6.
MAX(AI5,AI6) Maximum of analogue inputs AI5 and AI6.
11.04
EXT REF1 MINIMUM Defines the minimum value for external reference REF1 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the minimum setting of the source signal used.
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
21
22
23
17
18
19
20
12
13
14
15
16
8
9
10
11
FbEq
6
7
83
Actual signals and parameters
84
Index Name/Selection
0 … 120 Hz
Description
Example: Analogue input AI1 is selected as the reference source (value of parameter 11.03
is AI1). The reference minimum and maximum correspond the AI minimum and maximum settings as follows:
EXT REF1 Range
FbEq
0 … 120
2’
1 parameter 13.01
2 parameter 13.02
1’ parameter 11.04
2’ parameter 11.05
1’
AI1 Range
1 2
Note: If the reference is given through fieldbus, the scaling differs from that of
an analogue signal. See the chapter
11.05
EXT REF1 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source signal.
0 … 120 Hz See parameter 11.04
120
11.06
EXT REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2.
KEYPAD See parameter 11.03
.
AI1
AI2
See parameter
See parameter
11.03
11.03
.
.
1
2
3
AI3
AI1+AI3
AI2+AI3
AI1-AI3
AI2-AI3
AI1*AI3
AI2*AI3
MIN(AI1,3)
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
11.03
11.03
11.03
11.03
11.03
11.03
11.03
11.03
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
MIN(AI2,3)
MAX(AI1,3)
MAX(AI2,3)
COMM.MODULE
EXT2REF PTR
AI5
AI6
AI5+AI6
AI5-AI6
AI5*AI6
MIN(AI5,AI6)
MAX(AI5,AI6)
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
11.03
11.03
11.03
11.03
Analogue input AI5.
Analogue input AI6.
.
.
.
.
Source selected by parameter 11.11
.
Summation of analogue inputs AI5 and AI6.
Subtraction of analogue inputs AI5 and AI6.
Multiplication of analogue inputs AI5 and AI6.
Minimum of analogue inputs AI5 and AI6.
Maximum of analogue inputs AI5 and AI6.
16
17
18
19
12
13
14
15
20
21
22
23
Actual signals and parameters
85
Index Name/Selection Description
11.07
EXT REF2 MINIMUM Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the minimum setting of the source signal used.
0 … 100% With PFC TRAD macro, sets the minimum process reference in percent of the maximum process quantity. With Hand/Auto macro, sets the minimum frequency reference in percent of the Absolute Maximum Frequency.
- Source is an analogue input: See example at parameter 11.04
.
- Source is a serial link: See the chapter
.
11.08
EXT REF2 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the maximum setting of the source signal used.
0 … 500% Setting range. Correspondence to the source signal limits:
- Source is an analogue input: See parameter 11.04
.
- Source is a serial link: See the chapter
.
FbEq
0 … 10000
0 … 50000
11.09
EXT 1/2 SEL PTR
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
11.10
EXT 1 REF PTR
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
11.11
EXT 2 REF PTR
Defines the source or constant for value EXT 1/2 SEL PTR of parameter 11.02
.
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
-
Defines the source or constant for value EXT1REF PTR of parameter 11.03
.
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
-
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
12 CONSTANT FREQ
Defines the source or constant for value
11.06
.
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
-
12.01
CONST FREQ SEL
NOT SEL
DI4 (FREQ1)
Constant frequency selection and values. An active constant frequency overrides the drive frequency reference.
Note: If the PFC TRAD macro is selected, parameter 12.01 is set to a value other than NOT SEL, and one of the selected digital inputs is ON, the PFC logic is bypassed, i.e. no process PI controller is in use and the direct-on-line motors are not started.
Activates the constant frequencies or selects the activation signal.
No constant frequencies in use.
1
2
DI5 (FREQ2)
DI4,5
Frequency defined by parameter 12.02
is activated through digital input DI4.
1 = active, 0 = inactive.
Frequency defined by parameter 12.03
is activated through digital input DI5.
1 = active, 0 = inactive.
Constant frequency selection through digital input DI4 and DI5.
3
4
DI4 DI5 Constant speed in use
0 0 No constant frequency
1
0
1
0
1
1
Frequency defined by parameter
Frequency defined by parameter
Frequency defined by parameter
12.02
12.03
12.04
DI11 (FREQ1)
DI12 (FREQ2)
DI11,12
Frequency defined by parameter 12.02
is activated through digital input DI11.
1 = active, 0 = inactive.
Frequency defined by parameter 12.03
is activated through digital input DI12.
1 = active, 0 = inactive.
See selection DI4,5.
5
6
7
Actual signals and parameters
86
Index Name/Selection
DI1 (FREQ1)
12.02
CONST FREQ 1
0 … 120 Hz
12.03
CONST FREQ 2
0 … 120 Hz
12.04
CONST FREQ 3
Description
Frequency defined by parameter 12.02
is activated through digital input DI1.
1 = active, 0 = inactive.
Defines frequency 1. An absolute value; does not include direction information.
Setting range
Defines frequency 2. An absolute value; does not include direction information.
Setting range
Defines frequency 3. An absolute value; does not include direction information.
FbEq
8
0 … 120
0 … 120
0 … 120 Hz Setting range
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS
Analogue input signal processing.
13.01
MINIMUM AI1
0 V
2 V
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
13.02
MAXIMUM AI1
10 V
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
0 … 120
Defines the minimum value for analogue input AI1. When used as a reference, the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting.
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1, this value corresponds to the value of parameter 11.04
.
Zero volts. Note: The program cannot detect a loss of analogue input signal.
1
Two volts.
The value measured by the tuning function. See the selection TUNE .
Triggering of the value measurement. Procedure:
- Connect the minimum signal to input.
- Set the parameter to TUNE.
Note: The readable range in tuning is 0 … 10 V.
2
3
4
Defines the maximum value for analogue input AI1. When used as a reference, the value corresponds to the reference maximum setting.
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1, this value corresponds to the value of parameter 11.05
.
Ten volts (DC).
The value measured by the tuning function. See the selection TUNE .
Triggering of the value measurement. Procedure:
- Connect the maximum signal to input.
- Set the parameter to TUNE.
Note: The readable range in tuning is 0 … 10 V.
1
2
3
Actual signals and parameters
FbEq
87
Index Name/Selection
13.03
SCALE AI1
Description
Scales analogue input AI1.
Example: The effect on frequency reference REF1 when:
- REF1 source selection (Parameter 11.03
) = AI1+AI3
- REF1 maximum value setting (Parameter 11.05
) = 120 Hz
- Actual AI1 value = 4 V (40% of the full scale value)
- Actual AI3 value = 12 mA (60% of the full scale value)
- AI1 scaling = 100%, AI3 scaling = 10%
AI1 AI3 AI1 + AI3
10 V 120 Hz 20 mA 12 Hz 120 Hz
0.0 … 1000.0%
13.04
FILTER AI1
0.00 … 10.00 s
13.05
INVERT AI1
NO
YES
13.06
MINIMUM AI2
0 mA
4 mA
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
13.07
MAXIMUM AI2
20 mA
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
60%
7.2 Hz
55.2 Hz
40% 48 Hz
0 V 0 mA 0 rpm
Scaling range
Defines the filter time constant for analogue input AI1.
%
Unfiltered Signal
O = I × (1 - e
-t/T
)
100
63
Filtered Signal
I = filter input (step)
O = filter output t = time
T = filter time constant
t
T
0 … 10000
Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware (10 ms time constant). This cannot be changed by any parameter.
Filter time constant
Activates/deactivates the inversion of analogue input AI1.
No inversion
Inversion active. The maximum value of the analogue input signal corresponds to the minimum reference and vice versa.
0 … 1000
0
65535
See parameter 13.01
.
See parameter 13.01
. 1
See parameter 13.01
.
See parameter 13.01
.
2
3
See parameter 13.01
.
See parameter 13.02
.
4
See parameter 13.02
.
1
See parameter 13.02
. 2
See parameter 13.02
. 3
Actual signals and parameters
88
Index Name/Selection
13.08
SCALE AI2
0.0 … 1000.0%
13.09
FILTER AI2
0.00 … 10.00 s
13.10
INVERT AI2
NO
YES
13.11
MINIMUM AI3
0 mA
4 mA
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
13.12
MAXIMUM AI3
20 mA
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
13.13
SCALE AI3
0.0 … 1000.0%
13.14
FILTER AI3
0.00 … 10.00 s
13.15
INVERT AI3
NO
YES
13.16
MINIMUM AI5
0 mA
4 mA
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
13.17
MAXIMUM AI5
20 mA
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
13.18
SCALE AI5
0.0 … 1000.0%
13.19
FILTER AI5
0.00 … 10.00 s
13.20
INVERT AI5
NO
YES
13.21
MINIMUM AI6
0 mA
4 mA
Description
See parameter 13.03
.
See parameter 13.03
.
FbEq
0 … 10000
See parameter 13.04
.
See parameter 13.04
.
See parameter 13.05
.
See parameter 13.05
.
0 … 1000
See parameter 13.05
.
See parameter 13.01
.
See parameter 13.01
. 1
See parameter 13.01
. 2
0
65535
See parameter 13.01
.
See parameter 13.01
.
See parameter 13.02
.
See parameter 13.02
. 1
3
4
See parameter 13.02
. 2
See parameter 13.02
. 3
See parameter 13.03
.
See parameter 13.03
.
0 … 10000
See parameter 13.04
.
See parameter 13.04
.
See parameter 13.05
.
See parameter 13.05
.
0 … 1000
See parameter 13.05
.
See parameter 13.01
.
See parameter 13.01
. 1
See parameter 13.01
. 2
0
65535
See parameter 13.01
.
See parameter 13.01
.
See parameter 13.02
.
See parameter 13.02
. 1
3
4
See parameter 13.02
. 2
See parameter 13.02
. 3
See parameter 13.03
.
See parameter 13.03
.
0 … 10000
See parameter 13.04
.
See parameter 13.04
.
See parameter 13.05
.
See parameter 13.05
.
0 … 1000
See parameter 13.05
.
See parameter 13.01
.
See parameter 13.01
. 1
See parameter 13.01
. 2
0
65535
Actual signals and parameters
89
Index Name/Selection
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
13.22
MAXIMUM AI6
20 mA
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
13.23
SCALE AI6
0.0 … 1000.0%
13.24
FILTER AI6
0.00 … 10.00 s
Description
See parameter 13.01
.
See parameter 13.01
.
See parameter 13.02
.
See parameter 13.02
. 1
See parameter 13.02
. 2
See parameter 13.02
. 3
FbEq
3
4
See parameter 13.03
.
See parameter 13.03
.
See parameter 13.04
.
See parameter 13.04
.
0 … 10000
0 … 1000
13.25
INVERT AI6
NO
YES
14 RELAY OUTPUTS
See parameter 13.05
.
See parameter 13.05
.
See parameter 13.05
.
Status information indicated through the relay outputs, and the relay operating delays
14.01
RELAY RO1 OUTPUT Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO1. The relay energises when the status meets the setting.
M1 START Start/stop control for motor 1 (Interlocks enabled) or auxiliary motor 1
(Interlocks OFF). Should be selected only with the PFC TRAD macro active.
See also parameter 42.04
.
Note: The parameter (or parameter 14.04
) must be set to this value if any of the following conditions is valid:
- (External control) External reference 2 is active and par. 42.06 is greater than zero.
- Par. 42.01
is 1 or greater.
NOT USED
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
FAULT(-1)
FAULT(RST)
STALL WARN
STALL FLT
MOT TMP WRN
MOT TMP FLT
ACS TMP WRN
ACS TMP FLT
FAULT/WARN
WARNING
REVERSED
EXT CTRL
0
65535
1
Not used.
Ready to function: Run Enable signal on, no fault.
Running: Start signal on, Run Enable signal on, no active fault.
Fault
Inverted fault. Relay is de-energised on a fault trip.
Fault. Automatic reset after the autoreset delay. See parameter group 31
Warning by the stall protection function. See parameter 30.10
.
Fault trip by the stall protection function. See parameter 30.10
.
Warning trip of the motor temperature supervision function. See parameter
30.04
.
Fault trip of the motor temperature supervision function. See parameter 30.04
. 11
Warning by the drive temperature supervision function: 115 °C (239 °F).
12
Fault trip by the drive temperature supervision function: 125 °C (257 °F).
Fault or warning active
13
14
Warning active
Motor rotates in reverse direction.
Drive is under external control.
15
16
17
8
9
10
4
5
2
3
6
7
Actual signals and parameters
90
Index Name/Selection
REF 2 SEL
DC OVERVOLT
DC UNDERVOL
FREQ 1 LIM
FREQ 2 LIM
CURRENT LIM
REF 1 LIM
REF 2 LIM
STARTED
LOSS OF REF
AT SPEED
ACT 1 LIM
ACT 2 LIM
COMM. MODULE
INLET LOW
OUTLET HIGH
Description
External reference REF 2 is in use.
The intermediate circuit DC voltage has exceeded the overvoltage limit.
The intermediate circuit DC voltage has fallen below the undervoltage limit.
20
Motor frequency at supervision limit 1. See parameters 32.01
and 32.02
. 21
Motor speed at supervision limit 2. See parameters 32.03
and 32.04
. 22
Motor current at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.05
and 32.06
.
23
24 External reference REF1 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.07
and
32.08
.
External reference REF2 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.09
and
32.10
.
25
FbEq
18
19
26
27
28
The drive has received a start command.
The drive has no reference.
The actual value has reached the reference value. In speed control, the speed error is less or equal to 10% of the nominal motor speed.
Actual value ACT1 at a supervision limit. See parameters 32.11
and 32.12
.
Actual value ACT2 at a supervision limit. See parameters 32.13
and 32.14
.
The relay is controlled by fieldbus reference REF3. See the chapter
.
Pressure at the pump/fan inlet has fallen below the set supervision limit (and remained so longer than the set delay time). Refer to parameter group 44.
Pressure at the pump/fan outlet has exceeded the set supervision limit (and remained so longer than the set delay time). Refer to parameter group 44.
29
30
31
32
33
34 PROFILE HIGH
NOT USED
Actual signal
has remained above the set supervision limit longer than the set delay time.
See parameter group 44.
Source selected by parameter 14.08
.
RO PTR1
14.02
RELAY RO2 OUTPUT Selects the drive status to be indicated through relay output RO2. The relay energises when the status meets the setting.
M2 START Start/stop control for motor 2 (Interlocks enabled) or auxiliary motor 2
(Interlocks OFF). Should be selected only with the PFC TRAD macro active.
See also parameter 42.04
.
Note: The parameter (or parameter 14.05
) must be set to this value if any of the following conditions apply:
- (External control) External reference 2 is active, par. 42.06 is greater than zero, and par. 42.01 is 1 or greater.
- Par. 42.01
is 1 or greater.
See parameter 14.01
.
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
FAULT(-1)
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
14.01
14.01
14.01
14.01
.
.
.
.
FAULT(RST)
STALL WARN
STALL FLT
MOT TMP WRN
MOT TMP FLT
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
35
1
7
8
5
6
2
3
4
9
10
11
Actual signals and parameters
91
Index Name/Selection
ACS TMP WRN
ACS TMP FLT
FAULT/WARN
WARNING
REVERSED
EXT CTRL
REF 2 SEL
DC OVERVOLT
DC UNDERVOL
FREQ 1 LIM
FREQ 2 LIM
CURRENT LIM
REF 1 LIM
REF 2 LIM
Description
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
STARTED
LOSS OF REF
AT SPEED
ACT 1 LIM
ACT 2 LIM
COMM. MODULE
INLET LOW
OUTLET HIGH
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
14.01
14.01
14.01
14.01
14.01
14.01
14.01
14.01
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PROFILE HIGH
RO PTR2
See parameter 14.01
.
Source selected by parameter 14.09
.
14.03
RELAY RO3 OUTPUT Selects the drive status to be indicated through relay output RO3. The relay energises when the status meets the setting.
M3 START Start/stop control for motor 3 (Interlocks enabled) or auxiliary motor 3
(Interlocks OFF). Should be selected only with the PFC TRAD macro active.
See also parameter 42.04
.
Note: The parameter (or parameter 14.06
) must be set to this value if any of the following conditions apply:
- (External control) External reference 2 is active, par. 42.06 is greater than zero, and par. 42.01 is 2 or greater.
- Par. 42.01
is 2 or greater.
NOT USED
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
FAULT(-1)
FAULT(RST)
STALL WARN
STALL FLT
MOT TMP WRN
MOT TMP FLT
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
1
7
8
5
6
2
3
4
9
10
11
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
FbEq
12
13
30
31
32
33
26
27
28
29
34
35
Actual signals and parameters
92
Index Name/Selection
ACS TMP WRN
ACS TMP FLT
FAULT/WARN
WARNING
REVERSED
EXT CTRL
REF 2 SEL
DC OVERVOLT
DC UNDERVOL
FREQ 1 LIM
FREQ 2 LIM
CURRENT LIM
REF 1 LIM
REF 2 LIM
STARTED
LOSS OF REF
AT SPEED
MAGN READY
USER 2 SEL
COMM. MODULE
INLET LOW
OUTLET HIGH
PROFILE HIGH
RO PTR3
14.04
RDIO MOD1 RO1
M4 START
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
FAULT(-1)
FREQ 1 LIM
ACT 1 LIM
INLET LOW
OUTLET HIGH
PROFILE HIGH
Description
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
The motor is magnetised and ready to give nominal torque (nominal magnetising of the motor has been reached).
User Macro 2 is in use.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
Source selected by parameter 14.10
.
Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO1 of digital I/O extension module 1 (optional, see parameter 98.03).
Start/stop control for motor 4 (Interlocks enabled) or auxiliary motor 4
(Interlocks OFF). Should be selected only with the PFC TRAD macro active.
See also parameter 42.04
.
Note: The parameter (or parameter 14.07
) must be set to this value if any of the following conditions apply:
- (External control) External reference 2 is active, par. 42.06 is greater than zero, and par. 42.01 is 3 or greater.
- Par. 42.01
is 3 or greater.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
30
31
32
33
34
35
1
7
8
5
6
2
3
4
9
10
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
26
27
28
29
14
15
16
17
FbEq
12
13
Actual signals and parameters
93
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
FAULT(-1)
FREQ 2 LIM
ACT 2 LIM
INLET LOW
OUTLET HIGH
PROFILE HIGH
M2 START
RO PTR5
14.06
RDIO MOD2 RO1
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
FAULT(-1)
FREQ 1 LIM
ACT 1 LIM
INLET LOW
OUTLET HIGH
PROFILE HIGH
M3 START
RO PTR6
14.07
RDIO MOD2 RO2
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
FAULT(-1)
FREQ 2 LIM
ACT 2 LIM
INLET LOW
Index Name/Selection
M1 START
RO PTR4
14.05
RDIO MOD1 RO2
M5 START
Description
See parameter 14.01
.
Source selected by parameter 14.11
.
Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO2 of digital I/O extension module 1 (optional, see parameter 98.03).
Start/stop control for motor 5 when the Interlocks function is in use. Should be selected only with the PFC TRAD macro active. See also parameter 42.04
.
Note: The parameter must be set to this value if any of the following conditions apply:
- (External control) External reference 2 is active, par. 42.06 is greater than zero, and par. 42.01 is 4.
- Par. 42.01
is 4.
1
FbEq
11
12
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.02
.
Source selected by parameter 14.12
.
Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO1 of digital I/O extension module 2 (optional, see parameter 98.03).
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
10
11
12
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
See parameter
14.01
14.01
14.01
14.01
14.01
14.01
14.01
14.01
14.01
14.03
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Source selected by parameter
Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO2 of digital I/O extension module 2 (optional, see parameter 98.03).
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
14.13
.
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
Actual signals and parameters
94
Index Name/Selection
OUTLET HIGH
PROFILE HIGH
M4 START
RO PTR7
14.08
RO PTR1
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
14.09
RO PTR2
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
14.10
RO PTR3
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
14.11
RO PTR4
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
14.12
RO PTR5
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
14.13
RO PTR6
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
14.14
RO PTR7
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
15 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
15.01
ANALOGUE
OUTPUT1
NOT USED
SPEED
FREQUENCY
CURRENT
TORQUE
POWER
Description
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.01
.
See parameter 14.04
.
Source selected by parameter 14.14
.
Defines the source or constant for value
14.01
.
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
-
FbEq
8
9
10
11
Defines the source or constant for value
14.02
.
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
-
Defines the source or constant for value RO PTR3 of parameter 14.03
.
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
-
Defines the source or constant for value RO PTR4 of parameter 14.04
.
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
-
Defines the source or constant for value RO PTR5 of parameter 14.05
.
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
-
Defines the source or constant for value
14.06
.
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
-
Defines the source or constant for value RO PTR7 of parameter 14.07
.
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
-
Selection of the actual signals to be indicated through the analogue outputs.
Output signal processing. See also parameter group
.
Connects a drive signal to analogue output AO1.
Not in use 1
Motor speed. 20 mA = motor nominal speed. The updating interval is 24 ms.
2
Output frequency. 20 mA = motor nominal frequency. The updating interval is
24 ms.
3
Output current. 20 mA = motor nominal current. The updating interval is 24 ms. 4
5 Motor torque. 20 mA = 100% of motor nominal rating. The updating interval is
24 ms.
Motor power. 20 mA = 100% of motor nominal rating. The updating interval is
100 ms.
6
Actual signals and parameters
95
Index Name/Selection
DC BUS VOLT
OUTPUT VOLT
REFERENCE
CONTROL DEV
ACTUAL 1
ACTUAL 2
PICON OUTP
PICON REF
ACTUAL FUNC
COMM MODULE
AO1 PTR
15.02
INVERT AO1
NO
YES
15.03
MINIMUM AO1
0 mA
4 mA
15.04
FILTER AO1
0.00 … 10.00 s
15.05
SCALE AO1
Description
DC bus voltage. 20 mA = 100% of the reference value. The reference value is
540 VDC. ( = 1.35 × 400 V) for 380 ... 415 VAC supply voltage rating and
675 VDC ( = 1.35 × 500 V) for 380 ... 500 VAC supply. The updating interval is
24 ms.
FbEq
7
Motor voltage. 20 mA = motor rated voltage. The updating interval is 100 ms. 8
Active reference that the drive is currently following. 20 mA = 100 % of the active reference. The updating interval is 24 ms.
9
The difference between the reference and the actual value of the process PI controller. 0/4 mA = -100%, 10/12 mA = 0%, 20 mA = 100%. The updating interval is 24 ms.
10
11 Value of variable ACT1 used in the process PI control. 20 mA = value of parameter 40.06
. The updating interval is 24 ms.
Value of variable ACT2 used in the process PI control. 20 mA = value of parameter 40.10
. The updating interval is 24 ms.
The reference as taken from the output of the PI controller. The updating interval is 24 ms.
12
13
14 The reference as taken from the input of the PI controller. The updating interval is 24 ms.
Result of the arithmetic operation selected by parameter 40.04
scaled by parameter 40.15
.
The value is read from fieldbus reference REF4. See
Source selected by parameter 15.11
.
Inverts the analogue output AO1 signal. The analogue signal is at the minimum level when the indicated drive signal is at its maximum level and vice versa.
15
16
17
Inversion off
Inversion on
Defines the minimum value of the analogue output signal AO1.
Zero mA
Four mA
Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO1.
Filter time constant
0
65535
1
2
0 … 1000
%
Unfiltered Signal
O = I · (1 - e
-t/T
)
100
63
Filtered Signal
I = filter input (step)
O = filter output t = time
T = filter time constant
t
T
Note: Even if you select 0 s as the minimum value, the signal is still filtered with a time constant of 10 ms due to the signal interface hardware. This cannot be changed by any parameters.
Scales the analogue output AO1 signal.
Actual signals and parameters
96
Index Name/Selection
10 … 1000%
15.06
ANALOGUE
OUTPUT2
NOT USED
SPEED
FREQUENCY
CURRENT
TORQUE
POWER
DC BUS VOLT
OUTPUT VOLT
REFERENCE
CONTROL DEV
ACTUAL 1
ACTUAL 2
PICON OUTP
PICON REF
ACTUAL FUNC
COMM MODULE
AO2 PTR
15.07
INVERT AO2
NO
YES
15.08
MINIMUM AO2
0 mA
4 mA
15.09
FILTER AO2
0.00 … 10.00 s
15.10
SCALE AO2
10 … 1000%
Description
Scaling factor. If the value is 100%, the reference value of the drive signal corresponds to 20 mA.
Example: The nominal motor current is 7.5 A and the measured maximum current at maximum load 5 A. The motor current 0 to 5 A needs to be read as 0 to 20 mA analogue signal through AO1. The required settings are:
1. AO1 is set to CURRENT by parameter 15.01
.
2. AO1 minimum is set to 0 mA by parameter 15.03
.
3. The measured maximum motor current is scaled to correspond to a 20 mA analogue output signal by setting the scaling factor (k) to 150%. The value is defined as follows: The reference value of the output signal CURRENT is the motor nominal current i.e. 7.5 A (see parameter 15.01
). To make the measured maximum motor current correspond to 20 mA, it should be scaled equally to the reference value before it is converted to an analogue output signal.
Equation:
k × 5 A = 7.5 A => k = 1.5 = 150%
See parameter 15.01
.
FbEq
100 …
10000
See parameter 15.01
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
.
The value is read from fieldbus reference REF5. See
.
Source selected by parameter 15.12
.
See parameter 15.02
.
See parameter 15.02
.
See parameter 15.02
.
See parameter 15.03
.
See parameter 15.03
.
See parameter 15.03
.
See parameter 15.04
.
See parameter 15.04
.
See parameter 15.05
.
See parameter 15.05
.
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
16
17
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
0
65535
1
2
0 … 1000
100 …
10000
Actual signals and parameters
97
Index Name/Selection
15.11
AO1 PTR
Description
Defines the source or constant for value
of parameter 15.01
.
FbEq
-
1000 =
1 mA
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
15.12
AO2 PTR
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
Defines the source or constant for value
of parameter 15.06
.
-
1000 =
1 mA
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04
for information on the difference.
16 SYSTEM CTR INPUT
Run Enable, parameter lock etc.
16.01
RUN ENABLE
YES
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
DI10
DI11
DI12
COMM.MODULE
Sets the Run Enable signal on, or selects a source for the external Run Enable signal. If Run Enable signal is switched off, the drive will not start or stops if it is running. The stopping mode is selected by parameter
Run Enable signal is on.
External signal required through digital input DI1. 1 = Run Enable.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
External signal required through the Fieldbus Control Word (bit 3).
RUN ENA PTR Source selected by parameter 16.08
.
16.02
PARAMETER LOCK Selects the state of the parameter lock. The lock prevents parameter changing.
OPEN
LOCKED
The lock is open. Parameter values can be changed.
Locked. Parameter values cannot be changed from the control panel. The lock can be opened by entering the valid code at parameter 16.03
.
16.03
PASS CODE
0 … 30000
16.04
FAULT RESET SEL
0
65535
0 … 30000
NOT SEL
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
Selects the pass code for the parameter lock (see parameter 16.02) .
Setting 358 opens the lock. The value will automatically revert to 0.
Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists.
Fault reset only from the control panel keypad (RESET key).
Reset through digital input DI1 or by control panel:
- If the drive is in external control mode: Reset by a rising edge of DI1.
- If the drive is in local control mode: Reset by the RESET key of the control panel.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
13
14
15
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
Actual signals and parameters
98
Index Name/Selection
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
DI10
DI11
DI12
ON STOP
COMM.MODULE
FLT RST PTR
16.05
USER MACRO IO
CHG
NOT SEL
DI1
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI10
DI11
DI12
16.06
LOCAL LOCK
FALSE
TRUE
Description
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
Reset along with the stop signal received through a digital input, or by the
RESET key of the control panel.
Reset through the fieldbus Control Word (bit 7), or by the RESET key of the control panel.
Source defined by parameter 16.10
.
Enables the change of the User Macro through a digital input. See parameter
99.02
. The change is only allowed when the drive is stopped. During the change, the drive will not start.
Note: Always save the User Macro by parameter 99.02 after changing any parameter settings, or reperforming the motor identification. The last settings saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and on again or the macro is changed. Any unsaved changes will be lost.
Note: The value of this parameter is not included in the User Macro. A setting once made remains despite the User Macro change.
Note: Selection of User Macro 2 can be supervised via relay output RO3. See parameter 14.03
for more information.
User macro change is not possible through a digital input.
Falling edge of digital input DI1: User Macro 1 is loaded into use. Rising edge of digital input DI1: User Macro 2 is loaded into use.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
Disables entering local control mode (LOC/REM key of the panel).
WARNING! Before activating, ensure that the control panel is not needed for stopping the drive!
15
16
1
2
12
13
14
8
9
10
11
FbEq
6
7
7
8
9
10
5
6
3
4
11
12
13
Local control allowed.
Local control disabled.
0
65535
Actual signals and parameters
99
Index Name/Selection
16.07
PARAMETER
BACKUP
DONE
SAVE..
16.08
RUN ENA PTR
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
16.09
CTRL BOARD
SUPPLY
Description
Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory.
Note: A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved automatically when changed from the panel but not when altered through a fieldbus connection.
Save completed.
Save in progress.
Defines the source or constant for value
16.01
.
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
INTERNAL 24V
EXTERNAL 24V
Defines the source of the control board power supply.
Note: If an external supply is used but this parameter has the value
INTERNAL, the drive trips on a fault at power switch-off.
Internal (default).
External. The control board is powered from an external supply.
16.10
FAULT RESET PTR Defines the source or constant for value
16.04
.
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
20 LIMITS
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04
for information on the difference.
Drive operation limits.
-
-
FbEq
0
1
1
2
20.01
MINIMUM FREQ Defines the allowed minimum frequency. If the value is positive, the motor will not run in the reverse direction.
Note: The limit is linked to the motor nominal frequency setting i.e. parameter 99.07. If 99.07 is changed, the default frequency limit will also change.
Minimum frequency limit.
-120.00 Hz …
120.00 Hz
20.02
MAXIMUM FREQ Defines the allowed maximum frequency.
Note: The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i.e. parameter 99.08
. If 99.08
is changed, the default speed limit will also change.
Maximum frequency limit.
-120.00 Hz …
120.00 Hz
20.03
MAXIMUM CURRENT
A
Defines the allowed maximum motor current in amperes.
0.0 … (depends on drive type)
Current limit
20.04
MAXIMUM TORQUE Defines the maximum torque limit for the drive.
0.0 … 600.0% Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque.
-12000 …
12000
-12000 …
12000
10 = 1 A
0 … 60000
20.05
OVERVOLTAGE CTL Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link.
Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque.
Note: The controller must be OFF to allow chopper operation.
OFF Overvoltage control deactivated.
ON Overvoltage control activated.
0
65535
Actual signals and parameters
100
Index Name/Selection
20.06
UNDERVOLTAGE
CTL
-600.0 … 0.0%
21 START/STOP
Description
Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link.
If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor speed in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit. By decreasing the motor speed, the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop. This will act as a power-loss ride-through functionality in systems with a high inertia, such as a centrifuge or a fan.
OFF
ON
20.07
PI MIN FREQ
Undervoltage control deactivated.
Undervoltage control activated.
Minimum frequency for the PI controller. Typically, this value corresponds to the frequency at the lower end of the pump performance curve.
Minimum frequency for the PI controller.
-120.00 Hz …
120.00 Hz
20.11
P MOTORING LIM Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the inverter to the motor.
0.0 … 600.0% Power limit in percent of the motor nominal power
20.12
P GENERATING LIM Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the motor to the inverter.
Power limit in percent of the motor nominal power
Start and stop modes of the motor.
21.01
START FUNCTION
AUTO
DC MAGN
CNST DC MAGN
FbEq
0
65535
-12000 …
12000
0 … 60000
-60000 … 0
Selects the motor starting method.
Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases. It includes the flying start function (starting to a rotating machine) and the automatic restart function (stopped motor can be restarted immediately without waiting the motor flux to die away). The drive motor control program identifies the flux as well as the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under all conditions.
Note: If parameter 99.04
= SCALAR, no flying start or automatic restart is possible by default. The flying start feature needs to be activated separately by parameter 21.08
.
DC magnetising should be selected if a high break-away torque is required.
The drive pre-magnetises the motor before the start. The pre-magnetising time is determined automatically, being typically 200 ms to 2 s depending on the motor size. DC MAGN guarantees the highest possible break-away torque.
Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is selected.
Note: DC magnetising cannot be selected if parameter 99.04
= SCALAR.
Constant DC magnetising should be selected instead of DC magnetising if constant pre-magnetising time is required (e.g. if the motor start must be simultaneous with a mechanical brake release). This selection also guarantees the highest possible break-away torque when the pre-magnetising time is set long enough. The pre-magnetising time is defined by parameter 21.02
.
Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is selected.
Note: DC magnetising cannot be selected if parameter 99.04
= SCALAR.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set magnetising time has passed although the motor magnetisation is not completed. Ensure always in applications where a full break-away torque is essential, that the constant magnetising time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetisation and torque.
1
2
3
Actual signals and parameters
101
Index Name/Selection Description
21.02
CONST MAGN TIME Defines the magnetising time in the constant magnetising mode. See parameter 21.01. After the start command, the drive automatically premagnetises the motor the set time.
30.0 … 10000.0 ms Magnetising time. To ensure full magnetising, set this value to the same value as or higher than the rotor time constant. If not known, use the rule-of-thumb value given in the table below:
FbEq
30 … 10000
Motor Rated Power
< 10 kW
10 to 200 kW
200 to 1000 kW
Constant Magnetising Time
> 100 to 200 ms
> 200 to 1000 ms
> 1000 to 2000 ms
21.03
STOP FUNCTION
COAST
RAMP
Selects the motor stop function.
Stop by cutting off the motor power supply. The motor coasts to a stop.
Stop along a ramp (see parameter group
PFC TRAD macro, all auxiliary pumps are stopped first, then the drive stops along the ramp.
21.07
RUN ENABLE FUNC Stop mode when the Run Enable signal is removed. See parameter 16.01
.
WARNING! The drive will start after the Run Enable signal is restored if the Start signal remains ON.
1
2
RAMP STOP
COAST STOP
The application program stops the drive along the deceleration ramp defined in
The application program stops the drive by cutting off the motor power supply
(the inverter IGBTs are blocked). The motor rotates freely until at zero speed.
21.08
SCALAR FLYSTART Activates the flying start feature in scalar control mode. See parameters 21.01
and 99.04
.
OFF
ON
Inactive.
Active.
1
2
0
1
21.09
START INTRL FUNC Defines how the Start Interlock input on RMIO board affects the drive operation.
OFF2 STOP Drive running: 1 = Normal operation. 0 = Stop by coasting.
Drive stopped: 1 = Start allowed. 0 = No start allowed.
Restart after OFF2 STOP: Input is back to 1 and the drive receives rising edge of the Start signal.
OFF3 STOP
1
22 ACCEL/DECEL
Drive running: 1 = Normal operation. 0 = Stop by ramp. The ramp time is defined by parameter 22.07 EM STOP RAMP.
Drive stopped: 1 = Normal start. 0 = No start allowed.
Restart after OFF3 STOP: Start Interlock input = 1 and the drive receives rising edge of the Start signal.
Acceleration and deceleration times.
2
22.01
ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL
ACC/DEC 1
ACC/DEC 2
Selects the active pair of acceleration/deceleration times.
Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are used. See parameters 22.02
and 22.03
.
Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are used. See parameters 22.04
and 22.05
.
1
2
Actual signals and parameters
102
Index
22.02
Name/Selection
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
DI10
DI11
DI12
ACC/DEC PTR
ACCEL TIME 1
0.00 … 1800.00 s
22.03
DECEL TIME 1
0.00 … 1800.00 s
22.04
ACCEL TIME 2
0.00 … 1800.00 s
22.05
DECEL TIME 2
0.00 … 1800.00 s
22.06
SHAPE TIME
Description
Acceleration/deceleration time pair selection through digital input DI1. 0 =
Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in use. 1 = Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are in use.
See selection DI1 .
FbEq
3
See selection DI1 .
See selection DI1 .
See selection
See selection
See selection DI1 .
See selection DI1 .
See selection
See selection
DI1
DI1
DI1
DI1
See selection DI1 .
See selection DI1 .
.
.
.
.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Acceleration and deceleration times defined by parameters 22.08
and 22.09
.
15
Defines acceleration time 1, i.e. the time required for the frequency to change from zero to the maximum frequency.
- If the reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate, the motor frequency will follow the acceleration rate.
- If the reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate, the motor frequency will follow the reference signal.
- If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive operating limits.
Acceleration time 0 … 18000
Defines deceleration time 1, i.e. the time required for the frequency to change from the maximum (see parameter 20.02
) to zero.
- If the reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate, the motor frequency will follow the reference signal.
- If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate, the motor frequency will follow the deceleration rate.
- If the deceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive operating limits. If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short, ensure that the DC overvoltage control is on (parameter 20.05
).
Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application, the drive should be equipped with an electric braking option e.g. with a brake chopper and a brake resistor.
Deceleration time
See parameter 22.02
.
See parameter 22.02
.
See parameter 22.02
.
See parameter 22.02
.
Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp.
0 … 18000
0 … 18000
0 … 18000
Actual signals and parameters
103
Index Name/Selection
0.00 … 1000.00 s
Description
0.00 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps.
0.01 … 1000.00 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing from one speed to another. The S curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between.
FbEq
0 … 100000
A rule of thumb:
A suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp time is 1/5.
Speed
Max
Linear ramp: Par. 20.06
= 0 s
Par. 22.02
S-curve ramp:
Par. 20.06
> 0 s
Par. 22.06
time
22.07
22.08
STOP RAMP TIME
0.00 … 2000.00 s
ACC PTR
Note: In multimotor applications, the drive switches off the auxiliary motors one by one and ramps down the speed-regulated motor. Depending on the process, this may take more time than specified by this parameter.
Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped after an emergency stop command.
The emergency stop command can be given through a fieldbus or an
Emergency Stop module (optional). Consult the local ABB representative for more information on the optional module and the related parameter settings.
Deceleration time.
Defines the source or constant for value ACC/DEC PTR of parameter 22.01
(acceleration).
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
0 … 200000
100 = 1 s -255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 … C.32767
22.09
DEC PTR
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
Defines the source or constant for value ACC/DEC PTR of parameter 22.01
(deceleration).
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
100 = 1 s
Actual signals and parameters
104
Index Name/Selection
23 SPEED CTRL
23.01
KPS
0.0 … 250.0
23.02
TIS
0.01 … 999.97 s
23.03
SLIP GAIN
0.0 … 400.0%
Description
Speed controller variables. The parameters are not visible if parameter 99.04 is set to SCALAR.
Defines a relative gain for the speed controller. Great gain may cause speed oscillation.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant.
FbEq
%
Gain = K p
T
T
= 1
I
= Integration time = 0
D
= Derivation time = 0
Error Value
Controller Output e = Error value
Controller output = K p
× e t
Gain.
Defines an integration time for the speed controller. The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant. The shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error value is corrected. Too short an integration time makes the control unstable.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant.
0 … 25000
%
K p
× e
Controller Output
Gain = K p
T
I
T
D
= 1
= Integration time > 0
= Derivation time = 0
K p
× e e = Error value t
T
I
Integration time 10 …
999970
Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation control. 100% means full slip compensation; 0% means no slip compensation. The default value is
100%. Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite of the full slip compensation.
Example: A 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive. Despite full slip compensation (SLIP GAIN = 100%), a manual tachometer measurement from the motor shaft gives a speed value of 998 rpm. The static speed error is 1000 rpm - 998 rpm = 2 rpm. To compensate the error, the slip gain should be increased. With a gain value of 106%, no static speed error exists.
Slip gain value.
0 … 400
Actual signals and parameters
105
Index Name/Selection
25 CRITICAL FREQ
Description
Frequency bands within which the drive is not allowed to operate.
25.01
CRIT FREQ SELECT Activates/deactivates the critical frequencies function.
Example: A fan has vibration in the ranges of 30 to 40 Hz and 80 to 90 Hz. To make the drive skip the vibration ranges,
- activate the critical speeds function,
- set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below.
FbEq
Motor freq.
(Hz)
90
80
40
30
1 Par. 25.02
= 30 Hz
2 Par. 25.03
= 40 Hz
3 Par. 25.04
= 80 Hz
4 Par. 25.05
= 90 Hz
1 2 3 4
Frequency reference
(Hz)
OFF
ON
25.02
CRIT FREQ 1 LOW
0 … 120 Hz
Inactive
Active.
0
65535
Defines the minimum limit for critical frequency range 1.
Minimum limit. The value cannot be above the maximum (parameter 25.03
).
0 … 120
25.03
CRIT FREQ 1 HIGH Defines the maximum limit for critical frequency range 1.
0 … 120 Hz Maximum limit. The value cannot be below the minimum (parameter 25.02
).
25.04
CRIT FREQ 2 LOW
0 … 120 Hz
See parameter
See parameter
25.02
25.02
.
.
0 … 120
0 … 120
25.05
CRIT FREQ 2 HIGH See parameter 25.03
.
0 … 120 Hz See parameter 25.03
.
26 MOTOR CONTROL
26.01
FLUX OPTIMIZATION Activates/deactivates the flux optimisation function.
Note: The function cannot be used if parameter 99.04
= SCALAR.
NO Inactive
YES
26.02
FLUX BRAKING
NO
YES
Active
Activates/deactivates the flux braking function.
Note: The function cannot be used if parameter 99.04
= SCALAR.
Inactive
Active
0 … 120
0
65535
0
65535
Actual signals and parameters
106
Index Name/Selection Description
26.03
IR COMPENSATION Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR compensation). The function is useful in applications with high break-away torque, but no DTC motor control cannot be applied. The figure below illustrates the IR compensation.
Note: The function can be used only if parameter 99.04
is SCALAR.
FbEq
U /U
N
(%)
Relative output voltage. IR compensation set to 15%.
100%
15%
Relative output voltage. No IR compensation.
f (Hz)
Field weakening point
0 … 30% Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of the motor nominal voltage.
26.04
HEX FIELD WEAKEN Selects whether motor flux is controlled along a circular or a hexagonal pattern in the field weakening area of the frequency range (above 50/60 Hz).
0 … 3000
OFF
ON
The rotating flux vector follows a circular pattern. Optimal selection in most applications: Minimal losses at constant load. Maximal instantaneous torque is not available in the field weakening range of the speed.
Motor flux follows a circular pattern below the field weakening point (typically
50 or 60 Hz) and a hexagonal pattern in the field weakening range. Optimal selection in the applications that require maximal instantaneous torque in the field weakening range of the speed. The losses at constant operation are higher than with the selection OFF.
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS
Programmable protection functions
30.01
AI<MIN FUNCTION
FAULT
NO
PRESET FREQ
0
65535
Selects how the drive reacts when an analogue input signal falls below the set minimum limit.
Note: The analogue input minimum setting must be set to 0.5 V (1 mA) or above (see parameter group
).
The drive trips on a fault and the motor coasts to stop.
Inactive
The drive generates a warning
and sets the frequency to the value defined by parameter 30.18
.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the analogue input signal is lost.
1
2
3
LAST FREQ The drive generates a warning
and freezes the frequency to the level the drive was operating at. The value is determined by the average frequency over the previous 10 seconds.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the analogue input signal is lost.
4
30.02
PANEL LOSS
FAULT
Determines how the drive reacts to a control panel communication break.
Drive trips on a fault and the motor stops as defined by parameter 21.03
.
1
Actual signals and parameters
Index Name/Selection
PRESET FREQ
LAST FREQ
Description
The drive generates a warning and sets the frequency to the value defined by parameter 30.18
.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the analogue input signal is lost.
FbEq
2
The drive generates a warning and freezes the frequency to the level the drive was operating at. The value is determined by the average frequency over the previous 10 seconds.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the analogue input signal is lost.
3
30.03
EXTERNAL FAULT
NOT SEL
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
DI10
DI11
Selects an interface for an external fault signal.
Inactive
External fault indication is given through digital input DI1. 0: Fault trip. Motor coasts to stop. 1: No external fault.
See selection
See selection
See selection
See selection
See selection
See selection
See selection
See selection
See selection
See selection
DI1
DI1
DI1
DI1
DI1
DI1
DI1
DI1
DI1
DI1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
30.04
MOT THERM PROT Selects how the drive reacts when the motor overtemperature is detected by the function defined by Parameter 30.05
.
FAULT The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning level (95% of the allowed maximum value). The drive trips on a fault when the temperature exceeds the fault level (100% of the allowed maximum value).
WARNING The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning level (95% of the allowed maximum value).
NO
30.05
MOTOR THERM
PMODE
Inactive
Selects the thermal protection mode of the motor. When overtemperature is detected, the drive reacts as defined by parameter 30.04
.
1
2
3
7
8
9
10
5
6
3
4
11
12
13
107
Actual signals and parameters
108
Index Name/Selection
DTC
USER MODE
Description
The protection is based on the calculated motor thermal model. The following assumptions are used in the calculation:
- The motor is at ambient temperature (30 °C) when the power is switched on.
- The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the load curve and decreases if it operates below the curve.
- The motor thermal time constant is an approximate value for a standard selfventilated squirrel-cage motor.
It is possible to finetune the model by parameter 30.07
.
Note: The model cannot be used with high power motors (parameter 99.06
is higher than 800 A).
WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt.
FbEq
1
The protection is based on the user-defined motor thermal model and the following basic assumptions:
- The motor is at ambient temperature (30 °C) when power is switched on.
- The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the motor load curve and decreases if it operates below the curve.
The user-defined thermal model uses the motor thermal time constant
(parameter 30.06) and the motor load curve (parameters 30.07
, 30.08
and
30.09
). User tuning is typically needed only if the ambient temperature differs from the normal operating temperature specified for the motor.
WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt.
2
Actual signals and parameters
Index Name/Selection
THERMISTOR
Description
Motor thermal protection is activated through digital input DI6. A motor thermistor, or a break contact of a thermistor relay, must be connected to digital input DI6. The drive reads the DI6 states as follows:
FbEq
3
DI6 Status (Thermistor resistance)
1 (0 … 1.5 kohm)
0 (4 kohm or higher)
Temperature
Normal
Overtemperature
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor thermistor to the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the thermistor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment).
If the thermistor assembly does not fulfil the requirement, the other I/O terminals of the drive must be protected against contact, or a thermistor relay must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input.
WARNING! Digital input DI6 may be selected for another use. Change these settings before selecting THERMISTOR. In other words, ensure that digital input DI6 is not selected by any other parameter.
The figure below shows the alternative thermistor connections. At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, the shield is to be left unconnected.
Alternative 1
Thermistor relay
109
RMIO board, X22
6 DI6
7 +24 VDC
T
Motor
Alternative 2
RMIO board, X22
6 DI6
7 +24 VDC
T
Motor
10 nF
Actual signals and parameters
110
Index Name/Selection
30.06
MOTOR THERM
TIME
Description
Defines the thermal time constant for the user-defined thermal model (see the selection USER MODE of parameter 30.05
).
FbEq
Motor
Load
100%
Temperature
100%
63%
t
256.0 … 9999.8 s
30.07
MOTOR LOAD
CURVE
Motor thermal time constant
t
Time constant
Defines the load curve together with parameters 30.08 and 30.09. The load curve is used in the user-defined thermal model (see the selection USER
MODE at parameter 30.05
).
I/I
N
(%)
150
I = Motor current
I
N
= Nominal motor current
30.07
100
256 … 9999
50
30.08
30.09
Drive output frequency
50.0 … 150.0% Allowed continuous motor load in percent of the nominal motor current.
30.08
ZERO SPEED LOAD Defines the load curve together with parameters 30.07 and 30.09.
25.0 … 150.0% Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of the nominal motor current.
30.09
BREAK POINT Defines the load curve together with parameters 30.07 and 30.08.
1.0 … 300.0 Hz Drive output frequency at 100% load.
30.10
STALL FUNCTION
FAULT
WARNING
50 … 150
25 … 150
Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. The protection wakes up if:
- the motor torque is at the internal stall torque limit (not user-adjustable)
- the output frequency is below the level set by parameter 30.11
and
- the conditions above have been valid longer than the time set by parameter
30.12
.
The drive trips on a fault.
The drive generates a warning. The indication disappears in half of the time set by parameter 30.12
.
1
2
100 …
30000
Actual signals and parameters
111
Index Name/Selection
NO
30.11
STALL FREQ HI
0.5 … 50.0 Hz
30.12
STALL TIME
Description
Protection is inactive.
Defines the frequency limit for the stall function. See parameter 30.10.
Stall frequency
Defines the time for the stall function. See parameter 30.10.
10.00 … 400.00 s
30.13
UNDERLOAD
FUNCTIO
Stall time
Selects how the drive reacts to underload. The protection wakes up if:
- the motor torque falls below the curve selected by parameter 30.15
,
- output frequency is higher than 10% of the nominal motor frequency and
- the above conditions have been valid longer than the time set by parameter
30.14
.
Protection is inactive.
NO
WARNING
FAULT
30.14
UNDERLOAD TIME Time limit for the underload function. See parameter 30.13.
0 … 600 s Underload time.
30.15
UNDERLOAD
CURVE
The drive generates a warning.
The drive trips on a fault.
Selects the load curve for the underload function. See parameter 30.13.
T
M
/T
N
(%)
100
T
T
ƒ
M
N
N
= Motor torque
= Nominal motor torque
= Nominal motor frequency
1
2
3
FbEq
3
50 … 5000
10 … 400
0 … 600
1 … 5
30.16
MOTOR PHASE
LOSS
NO
FAULT
30.17
EARTH FAULT
WARNING
FAULT
30.18
PRESET FREQ
0.00 … 120.00 Hz
80
3
70%
60
2
50%
40
1
5
30%
20
4
0
ƒ
N
2.4 * ƒ
Number of the load curve.
Activates the motor phase loss supervision function.
N
Inactive.
Active. The drive trips on a fault.
Selects how the drive reacts when an earth fault is detected in the motor or the motor cable.
The drive generates a warning.
The drive trips on a fault.
Used as a reference when a fault occurs and the fault function is set to preset frequency.
Preset frequency.
1 … 5
0
65535
0
65535
0 … 120
Actual signals and parameters
112
Index Name/Selection
30.19
COMM FAULT FUNC Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication break, i.e. when the drive fails to receive the Main Reference Data Set or the Auxiliary Reference
Data Set. The time delays are given by parameters 30.20 and 30.21
.
FAULT
NO
Protection is active. The drive trips on a fault and stops the motor as defined by parameter 21.03
.
Protection is inactive.
PRESET FREQ
Description
Protection is active. The drive generates a warning and sets the frequency to the value defined by parameter 30.18
.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
FbEq
1
2
3
LAST FREQ Protection is active. The drive generates a warning and freezes the frequency to the level the drive was operating at. The value is determined by the average frequency over the previous 10 seconds.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
4
30.20
MAIN REF DS T-OUT Defines the time delay for the Main Reference Dataset supervision. See parameter 30.19
.
0.10 … 60.00 s Time delay
30.21
COMM FAULT RO/AO Selects the operation of the fieldbus controlled relay output and analogue output in a communication break. See groups
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS and the chapter
. The delay for the supervision function is given by parameter 30.22
.
ZERO Relay output is de-energised. Analogue output is set to zero.
LAST VALUE The relay output keeps the last state before the communication loss. The analogue output gives the last value before the communication loss.
WARNING! After the communication recovers, the update of the relay and the analogue outputs starts immediately without fault message resetting.
30.22
AUX REF DS T-OUT Defines the delay time for the Auxiliary Reference Dataset supervision. See parameter 30.19
. The drive automatically activates the supervision 60 seconds after power switch-on if the value is other than zero.
Note: The delay also applies for the function defined by parameter 30.21
.
0.00 … 60.00 s Time delay. 0.00 s = The function is inactive.
30.23
LIMIT WARNING
000000 … 11111111
Activates/deactivates limit warnings INV CUR LIM, DC BUS LIM, MOT CUR
LIM, MOT TORQ LIM and MOT POW LIM. For more information, see the chapter
Each of the above warnings is represented by a bit in a binary number as shown below. To activate a limit monitoring, set its bit to 1.
10 … 6000
0
65535
0 … 6000 bit 4 MOT POW LIM bit 3 MOT TORQ LIM bit 2 MOT CUR LIM bit 1 DC BUS LIM bit 0 INV CUR LIM
000xxxxx
Actual signals and parameters
113
Index Name/Selection Description
31 AUTOMATIC RESET
Automatic fault reset.
Automatic resets are possible only for certain fault types and when the automatic reset function is activated for that fault type.
The automatic reset function is not operational if the drive is in local control (L visible on the first row of the panel display).
31.01
NUMBER OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time defined by parameter 31.02
.
0 … 5
31.02
TRIAL TIME
1.0 … 180.0 s
31.03
DELAY TIME
0.0 … 3.0 s
31.04
OVERCURRENT
NO
YES
31.05
OVERVOLTAGE
NO
YES
31.06
UNDERVOLTAGE
NO
YES
31.07
AI SIGNAL<MIN
NO
YES
32 SUPERVISION
32.01
FREQ1 FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
FbEq
Number of automatic resets.
Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function. See parameter 31.01
.
Allowed resetting time.
0 … 5
100 …
18000
Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an automatic reset. See parameter 31.01
.
Resetting delay.
Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the overcurrent fault.
Inactive.
Active.
Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the fault AI SIGNAL<MIN
(analogue input signal under the allowed minimum level).
Inactive.
Active.
WARNING! The drive may restart even after a long stop if the analogue input signal is restored. Ensure that the use of this feature will not cause danger.
Supervision limits. A relay output can be used to indicate when the value is above/below the limit.
0 … 300
Active.
Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link overvoltage fault.
Inactive.
Active.
Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link undervoltage fault.
Inactive.
0
65535
0
65535
0
65535
0
65535
Activates/deactivates the frequency supervision function and selects the type of the supervision limit.
Supervision is not used.
Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit.
Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit.
1
2
3
Actual signals and parameters
114
Index Name/Selection
ABS LOW LIM
32.02
FREQ1 LIMIT
-120 … 120 Hz
32.03
FREQ2 FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
ABS LOW LIM
32.04
FREQ2 LIMIT
-120 … 120 Hz
32.05
CURRENT
FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
32.06
CURRENT LIMIT
0 … 1000 A
32.07
REF1 FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
32.08
REF1 LIMIT
0 … 120 Hz
32.09
REF2 FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
32.10
REF2 LIMIT
0 … 500%
32.11
ACT1 FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
32.12
ACT1 LIMIT
Description
Supervision wakes up if the value is below the set limit. The limit is supervised in both rotating directions. The figure below illustrates the principle.
FbEq
4
Frequency (Hz)
ABS LOW LIMIT
0
-ABS LOW LIMIT
Defines the frequency supervision limit. See parameter 32.01.
Value of the limit.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
Activates/deactivates the motor current supervision function and selects the type of the supervision limit.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
Defines the limit for the motor current supervision (see parameter 32.05).
Value of the limit.
Activates/deactivates the reference REF1 supervision function and selects the type of the supervision limit.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
Defines the limit for the reference REF1 supervision (see parameter 32.07).
Value of the limit.
Activates/deactivates the reference REF2 supervision function and selects the type of the supervision limit.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
Defines the limit for the reference REF2 supervision (see parameter 32.09).
Value of the limit in percent of motor nominal torque.
Activates/deactivates the supervision function for variable ACT1 of the process
PI controller and selects the type of the supervision limit.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
Defines the limit for ACT1 supervision (see parameter 32.11).
-120 … 120
1
2
3
4
-120 … 120
1
2
3
0 … 1000
1
2
3
0 … 120
1
2
3
0 … 5000
1
2
3
Actual signals and parameters
115
Index Name/Selection
0 … 200%
32.13
ACT2 FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
32.14
ACT2 LIMIT
Description
Value of the limit
Activates/deactivates the supervision function for variable ACT2 of the process
PI controller and selects the type of the supervision limit.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
See parameter 32.01.
Defines the limit for ACT2 supervision (see parameter 32.13).
FbEq
0 … 2000
1
2
3
0 … 2000 0 … 200% Value of the limit
32.15
RESET START CNT Resets the drive start counter (actual signal
).
NO
YES
33 INFORMATION
No reset.
Reset. The counter restarts from zero.
Program versions, test date
33.01
SW PACKAGE VER Displays the type and the version of the firmware package in the drive.
Decoding key:
AHxx7xyx
Product Series
A = ACS800
Product
H = ACS800 Pump Control Application Program
Firmware Version
7xyx = Version 7.xyx
33.02
APPLIC NAME
33.03
TEST DATE
40 PI-CONTROLLER
40.01
PI GAIN
Displays the type and the version of the application program.
Decoding key:
AHAx7xyx
Product Series
A = ACS800
Product
H = ACS800 Pump Control Application Program
Firmware Type
A = Application Program
Firmware Version
7xyx = Version 7.xyx
Displays the test date.
Date value in format DDMMYY (day, month, year)
Process PI control (parameter 99.02
= PFC TRAD)
Defines the gain of the process PI controller.
Actual signals and parameters
116
Index Name/Selection
0.1 … 100.0
Description
Gain value. The table below lists a few examples of the gain settings and the resulting PI controller output changes when
- a 10% or 50% error value is connected to the controller
(error = process reference - process actual value).
- motor maximum frequency is 60 Hz (Parameter 20.02)
FbEq
10 … 10000
PI Gain PI Output Change:
10% Error
0.5
3 Hz (0.5 × 0.1 × 60 Hz)
1.0
3.0
6 Hz (1.0 × 0.1 × 60 Hz)
18 Hz (3.0 × 0.1 × 60 Hz)
PI Output Change:
50% Error
15 Hz (0.5 × 0.5 × 60 Hz)
30 Hz (1.0 × 0.5 × 60 Hz)
60 Hz (> 3.0 × 0.5 × 60 Hz)
(limited)
40.02
PI INTEG TIME Defines the integration time for the process PI controller.
Error/Controller output
G × I
G × I
O
I
I = controller input (error)
O = controller output
G = gain t = time
Ti = integration time
time
Ti
0.50 … 1000.00 s Integration time 50 …
100000
40.03
ERROR VALUE INV Inverts the error at the process PI controller input (error = process reference - process actual value).
NO
YES
No inversion
Inversion
40.04
ACTUAL VALUE SEL Selects the process actual value for the process PI controller: The sources for the variable ACT1 and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 40.05 and
40.06. The result of the calculation is available as actual signal
Use the sqrt(A1-A2) or sqA1+sqA2 function if the PI controller controls flow with a pressure transducer measuring the pressure difference over a flow meter.
0
65535
ACT1
ACT1 - ACT2
ACT1 + ACT2
ACT1 * ACT2
ACT1 / ACT2
MIN[A1.A2]
MAX[A1.A2]
SQRT[A1-A2]
ACT1
Subtraction of ACT1 and ACT 2.
Addition of ACT1 and ACT2.
Multiplication of ACT1 and ACT2.
Division of ACT1 and ACT2.
Selects the smaller of ACT1 and ACT2.
Selects the greater of ACT1 and ACT2.
Square root of subtraction of ACT1 and ACT2.
SQA1 + SQA2 Addition of square root of ACT1 and square root of ACT2.
40.05
ACTUAL1 INPUT SEL Selects the source for the variable ACT1. See parameter 40.04
.
NO No source selected.
7
8
5
6
9
3
4
1
2
1
Actual signals and parameters
117
Index Name/Selection
AI1
AI2
AI3
ACT1 POINTER
AI5
AI6
Description
Analogue input AI1.
Analogue input AI2.
Analogue input AI3.
Source selected by parameter 40.16
.
Analogue input AI5.
Analogue input AI6.
40.06
ACTUAL2 INPUT SEL Selects the source for the variable ACT2. See parameter 40.04
.
NO No source selected.
AI1
AI2
Analogue input AI1.
Analogue input AI2.
AI3
AI5
AI6
40.07
ACT1 MINIMUM
-1000 … 1000%
Analogue input AI3.
Analogue input AI5.
Analogue input AI6.
Defines the minimum value for the variable ACT1 if an analogue input is selected as a source for ACT1. See parameter 40.05
. The minimum and maximum ( 40.08) settings of ACT1 define how the voltage/current signal received from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used by the process PI controller.
Minimum value in percent of the set analogue input range. The equation below shows how to calculate the value when analogue input AI1 is used as a variable ACT1.
6
7
4
5
FbEq
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
-1000 …
1000
AI1min - 13.01
13.02
- 13.01
× 100%
AI1min
13.01
13.02
The voltage value received from the measuring device when the measured process actual value is at the desired minimum level.
AI1 minimum (parameter setting)
AI1 maximum (parameter setting)
40.08
ACT1 MAXIMUM
Example: The pressure of a pipe system is to be controlled between 0 and 10 bar. The pressure transducer has an output range of 4 to 8 V, corresponding to pressure between 0 and 10 bar. The minimum output voltage of the transducer is 2 V and the maximum is 10 V, so the minimum and the maximum of the analogue input is set to 2 V and 10 V. ACT1 MINIMUM is calculated as follows:
ACT1 MINIMUM =
4 V - 2 V
10 V - 2 V
× 100% = 25%
Defines the maximum value for the variable ACT1 if an analogue input is selected as a source for ACT1. See parameter 40.07
. The minimum ( 40.09) and maximum settings of ACT1 define how the voltage/current signal received from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used by the process PI controller.
Actual signals and parameters
118
Index Name/Selection
-1000 … 1000%
Description
Maximum value in percent of the set analogue input signal range. The equation below instructs how to calculate the value when analogue input AI1 is used as a variable ACT1.
FbEq
-1000 …
1000
ACT1 MAXIMUM =
AI1max - 13.01
13.02
- 13.01
AI1max
13.01
13.02
× 100%
The voltage value received from the measuring device when the measured process actual value is at the desired maximum level.
AI1 minimum (parameter setting)
AI1 maximum (parameter setting)
40.09
ACT2 MINIMUM
-1000 … 1000%
40.10
ACT2 MAXIMUM
Example: See parameter 40.07
. ACT1 MAXIMUM is calculated as follows:
ACT1 MAXIMUM =
8 V - 2 V
10 V - 2 V
× 100% = 75%
See parameter 40.07
.
See parameter 40.07
.
See parameter 40.08
.
-1000 …
1000
-1000 … 1000%
40.11
ACT1 UNIT SCALE
-100000.00 …
100000.00
40.12
ACTUAL 1 UNIT
NO bar
%
C mg/l kPa
40.13
ACT2 UNIT SCALE
-100000.00 …
100000.00
40.14
ACTUAL 2 UNIT
NO bar
%
C mg/l
See parameter 40.08
.
Matches actual value 1 displayed on the control panel and the unit defined by parameter 40.12
.
Actual value 1 scaling.
-1000000
… 1000000
Selects the unit of actual value 1.
-1000 …
1000
3
4
1
2
5
6
Matches actual value 2 displayed on the control panel and the unit defined by parameter 40.14
.
Actual value 2 scaling.
-1000000
… 1000000
Selects the unit of actual value 2.
1
2
3
4
5
Actual signals and parameters
119
Index Name/Selection
kPa
40.15
ACTUAL FUNC
SCALE
-100000.00 …
100000.00
40.16
ACTUAL1 PTR
Description
Scales the result of the arithmetic operation selected by parameter 40.04
. The scaled value can be read through an analogue output (see parameter 15.01
).
Scaling for the ACTUAL FUNC signal.
-1000000
… 1000000
Defines the source or constant for value
40.05
.
FbEq
6
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04
for information on the difference.
41 PFC-CONTROL 1
Process references, start/stop frequencies for auxiliary motors or follower drives.
Only visible and effective when either the PFC TRAD or Multipump macro is selected.
41.01
SET POINT 1/2 SEL Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal that selects between the two process references. See also parameters 41.02
, 41.03
and 41.04
.
SET POINT 1 Process reference 1 selected.
SET POINT 2
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
DI10
DI11
Process reference 2 selected.
Digital input DI1. 0 = Process reference 1, 1 = Process reference 2.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
DI12 See selection DI1.
41.02
SET POINT 1 SRCE Selects the source of process reference 1.
EXTERNAL Process reference 1 is read from the source defined with parameter 11.06
. The control panel must be in external control mode (an “R” or a blank space displayed; see
on page
22 ). If the control panel is in local mode (an
“L” displayed), the panel gives a direct frequency reference and the PFC logic is bypassed.
0
1
2
3
6
7
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
65535 INTERNAL Process reference 1 is a constant value set by parameter 41.03
.
41.03
SPOINT 1 INTERNAL Defines process reference 1 when parameter 41.02
is set to INTERNAL.
0.0 … 100.0% Internal process reference 1.
41.04
SPOINT 2 INTERNAL Defines process reference 2.
0.0 … 100.0% Process reference 2.
0 … 10000
0 … 10000
Actual signals and parameters
120
Index Name/Selection Description
41.05
REFERENCE STEP 1 Sets a percentage that is added to the process reference when one auxiliary
(direct-on-line) motor or follower drive is running.
Example: The drive operates three parallel pumps that pump water into a pipe.
The pressure in the pipe is controlled. The constant pressure reference is set by parameter 41.03
. During low water consumption, only the speed-regulated pump is run. When water consumption increases, constant-speed (direct-online) pumps are started: first one pump, and if the demand grows further, also the other pump. As water flow increases, the pressure loss between the beginning (point of measurement) and the end of the pipe increases. By setting suitable reference steps the process reference is increased along the increasing pumping capacity. The reference steps compensate the growing pressure loss and prevent the pressure fall at the end of the pipe.
FbEq
0 … 10000 0.0 … 100.0% Reference step 1.
41.06
REFERENCE STEP 2 Sets a percentage that is added to the process reference when two auxiliary
(direct-on-line) motors or follower drives are running. See parameter 41.05
.
0.0 … 100.0% Reference step 2.
41.07
REFERENCE STEP 3 Sets a percentage that is added to the process reference when three auxiliary
(direct-on-line) motors or follower drives are running. See parameter 41.05
.
0.0 … 100.0% Reference step 3.
41.08
REFERENCE STEP 4 Sets a percentage that is added to the process reference when four auxiliary
(direct-on-line) motors or follower drives are running. See parameter 41.05
.
0.0 … 100.0% Reference step 4.
41.09
REFERENCE STEP 5 Sets a percentage that is added to the process reference when five follower drives are running. See parameter 41.05
.
0.0 … 100.0% Reference step 5.
41.10
REFERENCE STEP 6 Sets a percentage that is added to the process reference when six follower drives are running. See parameter 41.05
.
0.0 … 100.0% Reference step 6.
41.11
REFERENCE STEP 7 Sets a percentage that is added to the process reference when seven follower drives are running. See parameter 41.05
.
0.0 … 100.0% Reference step 7.
0 … 10000
0 … 10000
0 … 10000
0 … 10000
0 … 10000
0 … 10000
Actual signals and parameters
Index Name/Selection
41.12
START FREQ 1
Description
Defines the start frequency for auxiliary motor or follower drive 1.
When the output frequency of the drive exceeds this value + 1 Hz and no
auxiliary motors are running, the start delay counter (see parameters 41.26
and/or 42.02
) is started. If the frequency is still at the same level or higher when the delay elapses, the first auxiliary pump or follower starts.
If the PFC TRAD macro is selected, the output frequency of the drive is decreased by Start frequency 1 - Low frequency 1 ( 41.12
41.19
) after the auxiliary pump starts. With the Multipump macro, the freshly-started drive becomes the master; the previously-started drive becomes a follower and
starts to run at the speed selected by parameters 60.02
The following diagram shows the mutual order of some common frequencies in a pump application.
FbEq
Frequency
Maximum frequency ( 20.02
)
Start frequency 1 ( 41.12
) (Start frequency of auxiliary motor or follower 1)
Low frequency 1 ( 41.19
) (Stop frequency of auxiliary motor or follower 1)
Sleep level ( 43.03
)
PI controller minimum frequency (
0 Hz
(Negative frequencies only used by the Anti-jam function (
121
0.0 … 120.0 Hz
41.13
START FREQ 2
0.0 … 120.0 Hz
41.14
START FREQ 3
0.0 … 120.0 Hz
41.15
START FREQ 4
0.0 … 120.0 Hz
41.16
START FREQ 5
0.0 … 120.0 Hz
41.17
START FREQ 6
0.0 … 120.0 Hz
41.18
START FREQ 7
0.0 … 120.0 Hz
Minimum frequency ( 20.01
)
Start frequency 1.
Defines the start frequency for auxiliary motor or follower drive 2. See parameter 41.12
.
Start frequency 2.
Defines the start frequency for auxiliary motor or follower drive 3. See parameter 41.12
.
Start frequency 3.
Defines the start frequency for auxiliary motor or follower drive 4. See parameter 41.12
.
Start frequency 4.
Defines the start frequency for follower drive 5. See parameter 41.12
.
Start frequency 5.
Defines the start frequency for follower drive 6. See parameter 41.12
.
Start frequency 6.
Defines the start frequency for follower drive 7. See parameter 41.12
.
Start frequency 7.
0 … 120
0 … 120
0 … 120
0 … 120
0 … 120
0 … 120
0 … 120
Actual signals and parameters
122
Index Name/Selection
41.19
LOW FREQ 1
0.0 … 120.0 Hz
41.20
LOW FREQ 2
0.0 … 120.0 Hz
41.21
LOW FREQ 3
0.0 … 120.0 Hz
41.22
LOW FREQ 4
0.0 … 120.0 Hz
41.23
LOW FREQ 5
0.0 … 120.0 Hz
41.24
LOW FREQ 6
0.0 … 120.0 Hz
41.25
LOW FREQ 7
0.0 … 120.0 Hz
41.26
FOLLOWER START
DL
0.0 … 3600.0 s
41.27
FOLLOWER STOP
DLY
0.0 … 3600.0 s
42 PFC-CONTROL 2
42.01
NBR OF AUX
MOTORS
ZERO
ONE
TWO
THREE
Description
Defines the low (stop) frequency for auxiliary motor or follower drive 1.
When the output frequency of the drive falls below this value - 1 Hz and one auxiliary motor is running, the stop delay counter (see parameters
42.03
) is started. If the frequency is still at the same level or lower when the delay elapses, the first auxiliary pump or follower stops.
If the PFC TRAD macro is selected, the output frequency of the drive is increased by Start frequency 1 - Low frequency 1 ( 41.12
41.19
) after the auxiliary pump stops. With the Multipump macro, the most recently started drive is stopped; the previously-started drive becomes the master.
Low frequency 1.
Defines the low (stop) frequency for auxiliary motor or follower drive 2. See parameter 41.19
.
Low frequency 2.
Defines the low (stop) frequency for auxiliary motor or follower drive 3. See parameter 41.19
.
Low frequency 3.
Defines the low (stop) frequency for auxiliary motor or follower drive 4. See parameter 41.19
.
Low frequency 4.
Defines the low (stop) frequency for follower drive 5. See parameter 41.19
.
Low frequency 5.
Defines the low (stop) frequency for follower drive 6. See parameter 41.19
.
Low frequency 6.
Defines the low (stop) frequency for follower drive 6. See parameter 41.19
.
Low frequency 7.
In a multipump application, defines a start delay for follower drives. See parameter 41.12
.
Follower start delay.
In a multipump application, defines a stop delay for follower drives. See parameter 41.19
.
Follower stop delay.
Auxiliary motor set-up (start/stop delays, autochange).
Only visible when the PFC TRAD macro is selected.
Defines the number of auxiliary motors, i.e. motors in excess of 1.
Note: After changing the value of this parameter, check the settings of the relay outputs in parameter group 14.
Note: Without additional hardware, the drive supports the use of up to two auxiliary motors*. An optional digital input/output extension module (RDIO) is required for the use of three to four auxiliary motors. See parameter group 98.
*Three auxiliary motors can be used without additional hardware if the Interlocks and
Autochange functions are not used (see below).
WARNING! Use of the Autochange function also requires the use of the Interlocks function.
FbEq
0 … 120
0 … 120
0 … 120
0 … 120
0 … 120
0 … 120
0 … 120
0 … 3600
0 … 3600
No auxiliary motors used (a one-pump/fan station).
One auxiliary motor used (two-pump/fan station).
Two auxiliary motors used (three-pump/fan station).
Three auxiliary motors used (four-pump/fan station).
1
2
3
4
Actual signals and parameters
123
Index Name/Selection
FOUR
42.02
AUX MOT START
DLY
Description
Four auxiliary motors used (five-pump/fan station).
Start delay for auxiliary motors.
FbEq
5
Frequency
42.02
42.08
f
max
41.12
+ 1 Hz
41.19
- 1 Hz
f
min
42.03
42.09
Time
ON
OFF
Aux. motor 1
Stop/Start
ON
OFF
Start
Increasing flow
Decreasing flow
Stop
0.0 … 3600.0 s Auxiliary motor start delay.
42.03
AUX MOT STOP DLY Stop delay for auxiliary motors. See parameter 42.02
.
0.0 … 3600.0 s Auxiliary motor stop delay.
42.04
INTERLOCKS Defines the use of the Interlocks function.
WARNING! Use of the Autochange function (parameter 42.06
) also requires the use of the Interlocks function.
0 … 3600
0 … 3600
The Interlocks function is used with multimotor applications where one motor at a time is connected to the output of the drive. The remaining motors are powered from the supply line and started and stopped by the relay outputs of the drive.
A contact of the manual on/off switch (or protective device, such as a thermal relay, etc.) of each motor is wired to the interlock circuit. The logic will detect if a motor is unavailable and start the next available motor instead.
If the interlock circuit of the speed-regulated motor is switched off, the motor is stopped and all relay outputs are de-energised. Then the drive will restart. The next available motor in the Autochange sequence will be started as regulated.
If the interlock circuit of a direct-on-line motor is switched off, the drive will not try to start the motor until the interlock circuit is switched on again. The other motors will operate normally.
The selection SET1 uses predominantly the standard inputs and outputs of the drive, while SET2 uses those of optional digital I/O extension modules (type
RDIO).
Actual signals and parameters
124
Index Name/Selection
OFF
Description
The Interlocks function is not in use; digital inputs DI2, DI3 and DI4 are available for other purposes. The speed-regulated motor is directly connected to the drive; auxiliary (direct-on-line) motors are started and stopped whenever necessary. The auxiliary motors can be controlled primarily through the standard relay outputs or optional digital I/O extension modules (type RDIO).
The selection between the desired relay outputs is made by the parameters in
Group 14.
Depending on the number of auxiliary motors (parameter 42.01
), the standard relay outputs are used as follows:
42.01
0
1
2
3
4
Usage of standard relay outputs
Output Assignment/Note
– N/A
RO1
RO1
RO2
RO1
Controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 1.
Controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 1.
Controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 2.
Controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 1.
RO2
RO3
RO1
RO2
RO3
RDIO1
RO1
Controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 2.
Controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 3.
Controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 1.
Controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 2.
Controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 3.
Relay output RO1 of the first RDIO module controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 4.
Note: The module must be enabled by parameter 98.03
.
FbEq
1
Alternatively, optional digital I/O extension modules can be used:
42.01
0
1
2
3
4
RDIO1
RO2
RDIO2
RO1
RDIO1
RO1
RDIO1
RO2
RDIO2
RO1
RDIO2
RO2
Usage of relay outputs of digital I/O extension modules
Output Assignment/Note
– N/A
RDIO1
RO1
RDIO1
RO1
RDIO1
RO2
RDIO1
RO1
Relay output RO1 of the first RDIO module controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 1.
Relay output RO1 of the first RDIO module controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 1.
Relay output RO2 of the first RDIO module controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 2.
Relay output RO1 of the first RDIO module controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 1.
Relay output RO2 of the first RDIO module controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 2.
Relay output RO1 of the second RDIO module controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 3.
Relay output RO1 of the first RDIO module controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 1.
Relay output RO2 of the first RDIO module controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 2.
Relay output RO1 of the second RDIO module controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 3.
Relay output RO2 of the second RDIO module controls the start/stop contactor of auxiliary motor no. 4.
Note: The RDIO modules must be enabled by parameters 98.03
and 98.04
.
Actual signals and parameters
Index Name/Selection
SET 1
Description
The Interlocks function is in use. Depending on the number of auxiliary motors, the relay outputs and digital inputs are used as follows:
42.01
0
1
2
3
4
I/O
DI2
RO1
DI2/3
Usage of relay outputs and digital inputs
Assignment/Note
Monitors the status of motor no. 1.
Controls the start/stop contactor of motor no. 1.
RO1/2
Monitor the status of motors no. 1 and 2 respectively.
Control the start/stop contactors of motors no. 1 and 2 respectively.
DI2/3/4 Monitor the status of motors no. 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
RO1/2/3
Control the start/stop contactors of motors 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
DI2/3/4 Monitor the status of motors no. 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
RDIO1
DI1 (DI7)
Digital input DI1 of the first RDIO module (DI7) monitors the status of motor 4.
RO1/2/3
RDIO1
RO1
Control the start/stop contactors of motors 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
Relay output RO1 of the first RDIO module controls the start/stop contactor of motor no. 4.
DI2/3/4 Monitor the status of motors no. 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
RDIO1
DI1/2
(DI7/DI8)
Digital inputs DI1 and DI2 of the first RDIO module (DI7 and DI8) monitor the status of motors 4 and 5 respectively.
RO1/2/3
RDIO1
RO1/2
Control the start/stop contactors of motors 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
Relay outputs RO1 and RO2 of the first RDIO module control the start/stop contactors of motors no. 4 and 5 respectively.
FbEq
2
Below is an example of two motors connected to the drive with SET1 selected.
125
~230 V AC
K1
ACS800
RMIO Board
~230 V AC
On/Off
3
K2.1
On/Off
3
M
3~
M1
M
3~
M2
Note: Any RDIO modules present must be enabled by parameters 98.03
and
98.04
.
Actual signals and parameters
126
Index Name/Selection
SET 2
Description
The Interlocks function is in use. Depending on the number of auxiliary motors, the relay outputs and digital inputs are used as follows:
FbEq
3
42.01
0
1
2
3
4
I/O
RDIO1 DI2
(DI8)
RDIO1 RO1
RDIO1
DI2/3
RDIO1
RO1/2
RDIO1
DI2/3
RDIO2 DI1
Usage of relay outputs and digital inputs
Assignment/Note
Digital input DI2 of the first RDIO module (DI8) monitors the status of motor no. 1.
Relay output RO1 of the first RDIO module controls the start/stop contactor of motor no. 1.
Digital inputs DI2 and DI3 of the first RDIO module (DI8 and DI9) monitor the status of motors no. 1 and 2 respectively.
Relay outputs RO1 and RO2 of the first RDIO module control the start/stop contactors of motors no. 1 and 2 respectively.
Digital inputs DI2 and DI3 of the first RDIO module (DI8 and DI9) monitor the status of motors no. 1 and 2 respectively.
Digital input DI1 of the second RDIO module (DI10) monitors the status of motor 3.
RDIO1
RO1/2
RDIO2 RO1
RDIO1
DI2/3
RDIO2
DI1/2
RDIO1
RO1/2
RDIO2
RO1/2
Not applicable.
Relay outputs RO1 and RO2 of the first RDIO module control the start/stop contactors of motors 1 and 2 respectively.
Relay output RO1 of the second RDIO module controls the start/stop contactor of motor 3.
Digital inputs DI2 and DI3 of the first RDIO module (DI8 and DI9) monitor the status of motors no. 1 and 2 respectively.
Digital inputs DI1 and DI2 of the second RDIO module (DI10 and
DI11) monitor the status of motors 3 and 4 respectively.
Relay outputs RO1 and RO2 of the first RDIO module control the start/stop contactors of motors 1 and 2 respectively.
Relay outputs RO1 and RO2 of the second RDIO module control the start/stop contactors of motors 3 and 4 respectively.
Below is an example of two motors connected to the drive with SET2 selected.
~230 V AC
K1
RDIO Module
~230 V AC
On/Off
3
K2.1
On/Off
3
42.06
AUTOCHANGE
INTERV
+24 V DC
M
3~
M1
M
3~
M2
Note: The RDIO modules must be enabled by parameters 98.03
and 98.04
.
Switches on the Autochange function, and specifies the Autochange interval.
See parameter 42.07
.
Actual signals and parameters
127
Index Name/Selection
0 h 00 min …
336 h 00 min
(14 days)
Description
Autochange interval. 0 h 00 min = Autochange function disabled.
Note: The counter runs only when the start signal of the drive is on.
WARNING! If the Autochange function is used, also the Interlocks function must be used, and parameter 21.03
set to COAST. In an
Autochange system, there is a contactor between the drive output and the speed-controlled motor. The contactor will be damaged if opened without first interrupting the power stage switching of the drive. The switching is interrupted when the interlock is switched off and the selected stop mode is
COAST.
42.07
AUTOCHANGE
LEVEL
Output frequency limit for the Autochange function.
The motor starting sequence is changed when the Autochange interval has elapsed and the output frequency is below this limit. Autochanging is indicated by a warning on the control panel display.
Note: The value of this parameter must be within allowed range (eg. between minimum and maximum limits). Otherwise no Autochanging is possible.
Note: When the drive power is switched off, the values of the starting sequence counter and the Autochange interval counter are stored. The counters will continue using these values after the power is switched on again.
Example: There are three motors in a system (parameter 42.01
is set to 2).
Autochange level is set to 40 Hz.
An Autochange occurs when the output frequency is below 40 Hz, and
Autochange interval since the previous Autochange has elapsed. Upon an
Autochange,
1) All motors are stopped
2) The starting sequence is incremented (from 1-2-3 to 2-3-1, etc.)
3) The contactor that controls the speed-regulated motor is closed
4) The delay set by parameter 42.10
is waited
5) The speed-regulated motor is energised and normal PFC operation starts.
If the Autochange level is 0 Hz and the interval has elapsed, Autochange will occur during a stop, eg. when the Sleep function is active.
Autochange level.
0.0 … 100.0 Hz
42.08
FREQ TIME ON DLY See diagram at parameter 42.02
.
0.0 … 3600.0 s
FbEq
0 … 20160
(min)
0 … 10000
0 … 3600
42.09
FREQ TIME OFF DLY See diagram at parameter 42.02
.
0.0 … 3600.0 s
42.10
PFC START DELAY Start delay for the speed-regulated motor. Does not affect the starting of the direct-on-line motors. See parameter 42.07
.
WARNING! There must always be a delay set if the motors are equipped with star-delta starters. The delay must be set longer than the time setting of the starter. After the motor is switched on by the relay output of the drive, there must be enough time for the star-delta starter to first switch to star and then back to delta before the motor is connected to the drive.
0 … 10000 ms PFC start delay.
0 … 3600
0 … 10000
Actual signals and parameters
128
Index Name/Selection
42.11
REGUL BYPASS
CTRL
Description
Selects whether the process PI controller is bypassed.
This parameter can be used in applications with a low number of sensors and low accuracy requirements.
Example: The capacity of the pumping station (outlet flow) follows the measured inlet flow.
Measured Inlet Flow = Reference for the Pumping Station
FbEq
Outlet
Pipe 1
3
M
3~
P1
Outlet
Pipe 2
3
3
Outlet
Pipe 3
M
3~
P2
M
3~
P3
Sewage
Tank
Inlet
Pipe
Drive
P1
P2
P3
Contactors
Main
Supply
3~
3 3
3
In the diagram below, the slopes of the lines describe the relation between the control signal (selected by parameter 40.04
) and the frequency of the controlled motor (i.e. drive output frequency) in a three-motor system. At full control signal level, all pumps are operating at maximum frequency.
Frequency
[Hz]
Max. freq.
Start freq. 2
Start freq. 1
No aux. motors ON
1 aux. motor
ON
2 aux. motors ON
Low freq. 2
Low freq. 1
Min. freq.
100%
Control
Signal
[%]
33% 66%
NO
YES
Process PI controller is in use.
Process PI controller is bypassed. The signal selected by parameter 40.04
is used as the frequency reference. The automatic start/stop of direct-on-line motors is related to this actual value signal instead of the output of the PI controller.
Sleep function set-up.
43 SLEEP FUNCTION
43.01
SLEEP SELECTION Controls the Sleep function.
OFF The Sleep function is disabled.
INTERNAL The Sleep function is activated and deactivated as defined by parameters
43.02
to 43.08
.
1
2
0
65535
Actual signals and parameters
Index Name/Selection
SLEEP1 PTR
SLEEP2 PTR
43.02
SLEEP DELAY
0.0 … 3600.0 s
129
Description
The Sleep function is controlled by the signal defined by parameter 43.09
. If the signal is OFF, the Sleep function is activated and deactivated as defined by parameters 43.02
to 43.08
.
When the signal switches ON, the reference is set to 0%. The drive will enter
Sleep mode as soon as the output frequency falls below the value of parameter 43.03
, and will not wake up as long as the signal stays ON.
After the signal switches OFF, the drive continues to operate according to the
Sleep function set-up parameters.
Note: With this selection, parameter 43.07
The Sleep function is activated by the signal defined by parameter 43.10
.
When the signal switches ON, the drive immediately enters Sleep mode if no auxiliary motors are running and the wake-up level (parameter 43.05
) has not been exceeded. (The sleep level is not observed.)
After the wake-up level is reached, the drive will wake up regardless of the state of the signal.
Sets the Sleep delay for the Sleep function.
If the output frequency of the drive stays below the value set by parameter
43.03
longer than the Sleep delay, the drive stops, and the control panel displays the warning “SLEEP MODE”. See the diagram at parameter 43.03
.
Sleep delay.
FbEq
3
4
0 … 3600
Actual signals and parameters
130
Index Name/Selection
43.03
SLEEP LEVEL
Description
Sets the frequency limit for the Sleep function. When the output frequency of the drive drops below this limit, the sleep delay counter is started. When the output frequency exceeds this limit, the sleep delay counter is reset.
Reference
Sleep boost time ( 43.08
)
Control panel:
SLEEP BOOST
Sleep boost step (
)
FbEq
Time
Wake-up delay
( 43.06
)
Selected process actual value
Wake-up level
( 43.05
)
Output frequency
t
sd
= Sleep delay ( 43.02
)
t < t sd
t
sd
Control panel:
SLEEP
MODE
Time
Sleep level
( 43.03
)
Time
STOP START
0.0 … 120.0 Hz
Note: The Sleep level setting should be greater than the minimum frequency setting (parameter 20.01
). Otherwise the output frequency of the drive will never fall below the Sleep level.
Sleep level in Hz.
Setting the parameter to 0 disables the Sleep function.
43.04
WAKE UP SEL MODE Defines the wake-up level.
WAKE UP 1 The wake-up level is given as percent of the used process reference. The drive enters the wake-up sequence when the currently selected process actual value falls below the wake-up level.
Example: The PFC application program follows a process reference set by parameter 41.03
. The table below shows the wake-up level with two process reference settings, and two wake-up level settings.
0 … 120
1
Value of 41.03
100%
80%
Value of 43.05
50%
40%
Wake-up level
50% of 100% = 50%
40% of 80% = 32%
Actual signals and parameters
Index Name/Selection
WAKE UP 2
Description
The wake-up level is related to the used process reference so that the range of parameter 43.05
inversely corresponds to the range between the process reference in use and 100% level.
FbEq
2
Reference
100%
Value of parameter 43.05
0%
131
Process reference used
100%
WAKE UP 3
WAKE UP 4
[ ]
43.05
WAKE UP LEVEL
0%
The relation is defined by the following equation:
Wake-up level [%] = 100 –
100% – REF[%]
100 where
REF = Process reference used
× (Value of par. 43.05
[%])
The drive enters the wake-up sequence when the selected process actual value exceeds the wake-up level.
Example: At 50% process reference, a wake-up level of 90% is obtained when parameter 43.05
is set to 20.0%:
90 = 100 –
=> 90 = 100 –
100 – 50
100
[par. 43.05
]
2
× [par. 43.05
]
=> [par. 43.05
] = 20
With the same setting, the wake-up level rises to 95% when process reference rises to 75%.
The drive enters the wake-up sequence when the currently selected process actual value falls below the wake-up level (par. 43.05
).
The drive enters the wake-up sequence when the currently selected process actual value exceeds the wake-up level (par. 43.05
).
Reserved.
Sets the process actual value limit for the Sleep function. When the selected process actual value falls below or exceeds (depending on the setting of parameter 43.04
) the limit, the wake-up delay counter is started.
The value is given as a percentage of an actual signal defined by parameter
43.04
.
Note: If the PI controller is bypassed (parameter 42.11
) or inverted ( 40.03
), the
Sleep function is interrupted whenever the process actual value exceeds the wake-up level. In this case, the wake-up level is taken as an absolute percentage value (of 100%).
3
4
Actual signals and parameters
132
Index Name/Selection
0.0 … 100.0%
43.06
WAKE UP DELAY
Description
Wake-up level.
Sets the wake-up delay for the Sleep function.
If the process actual value stays below or above (depending on the setting of parameter 43.04
) the wake-up level (parameters 43.04
and 43.05
) longer than the wake-up delay, the drive starts. See the diagram at parameter 43.03
.
0.0 … 3600.0 s Wake-up delay.
43.07
SLEEP BOOST STEP When the drive is entering Sleep mode, the reference is increased by this percentage for the time defined by parameter 43.08
. (The actual boosted reference is available as actual signal
.)
No auxiliary motors are started.
If active, Sleep boost is aborted when the drive wakes up.
See the diagram at parameter 43.03
.
Note: This parameter has no effect if parameter 43.01
0.0 … 100.0% Sleep boost step.
43.08
SLEEP BOOST TIME Sets the boost time for the Sleep boost step (parameter 43.07
).
0.0 … 3600.0 s Sleep boost time.
43.09
SLEEP1 SEL PTR
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
43.10
SLEEP2 SEL PTR
Defines the source or constant for value
of parameter 43.01
.
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
Defines the source or constant for value
of parameter 43.01
.
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on the difference.
44 PFC PROTECTION
Set-up of PFC protections.
44.01
INPUT PROT CTRL Enables, and selects the mode of, the primary supervision of pump/fan inlet pressure.
NOT SEL Primary inlet pressure supervision not used.
WARNING Detection of low inlet pressure produces a warning on the control panel display.
1
2
FbEq
0 … 10000
0 … 3600
0 … 10000
0 … 3600
Actual signals and parameters
133
Index Name/Selection
PROTECT
Description
Detection of low inlet pressure produces a warning on the control panel display. The output of the PI controller is ramped down (according to par.
44.17
) to the forced reference (set by parameter 44.08
). The drive will revert to the original reference if the pressure subsequently exceeds the supervision level.
The following diagram describes the inlet pressure supervision function.
FbEq
3
Measured inlet pressure
44.07 INPUT CTRL DLY
AI IN LOW LEVEL
AI IN VERY LOW
Time
PFC_reference
(EXT 2)
44.17 PI
REF DEC
TIME
44.08 INLET FORCED REF
Time
1
0
Time
1
0
Time
1
0
Time
FAULT Detection of low inlet pressure trips the drive on a fault.
44.02
AI MEASURE INLET Selects the analogue input for pump/fan inlet pressure supervision.
NOT USED
AI1
No analogue input selected.
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
AI2
AI3
AI5
AI6
44.03
AI IN LOW LEVEL
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
44.04
0.0 … 100.0%
VERY LOW CTRL
NOT SEL
STOP
Sets the supervision limit for the primary inlet pressure measurement. If the value of the selected input falls below this limit, the action defined by parameter 44.01
is taken after the delay set by parameter 44.07
expires.
The range corresponds to 0 … 10 V or 0 …20 mA on the analogue input. With a bipolar input, the absolute input value is considered.
Enables, and selects the mode of, the secondary inlet pressure supervision function. The function uses the analogue input selected by parameter 44.02
.
Secondary inlet pressure supervision not used.
Detection of very low inlet pressure stops the drive. The drive will start again if the pressure exceeds the supervision level.
4
0 … 100
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
Actual signals and parameters
134
Index Name/Selection
FAULT
44.05
AI IN VERY LOW
Description
Detection of very low inlet pressure trips the drive on a fault.
Supervision level for the secondary inlet pressure monitoring function. See parameter 44.04
.
44.06
0.0 … 100.0%
DI STATUS INLET
Supervision level.
Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch at the pump/fan inlet. The “normal” state is 1 (on). If the selected input switches to 0 (off), the action defined by parameter 44.01
is executed after the delay set by parameter
44.07
expires.
No digital input selected.
NOT USED
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
DI10
DI11
DI12
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through selected input.
44.07
INPUT CTRL DLY Sets the delay after which the action defined by parameter 44.01
is taken upon detection of low inlet pressure.
Delay.
0 … 60 s
44.08
INLET FORCED REF This reference is used after detection of low inlet pressure. See par. 44.01
.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation using this reference.
FbEq
3
0 … 60
8
9
10
11
12
13
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
0 … 100%
44.09
OUTPUT PROT
CTRL
NOT SEL
WARNING
Forced reference.
Enables, and selects the mode of, the primary supervision of pump/fan outlet pressure.
Primary outlet pressure supervision not used.
Detection of high outlet pressure produces a warning on the control panel display.
0 … 100
1
2
Actual signals and parameters
135
Index Name/Selection
PROTECT
Description
Detection of high outlet pressure produces a warning on the control panel display. The output of the PI controller is ramped down (according to par.
44.17
) to the forced reference (set by parameter 44.16
). The drive will revert to the original reference if the pressure subsequently falls below the supervision level.
The following diagram describes the outlet pressure supervision function.
FbEq
3
Measured outlet pressure
44.15 OUTPUT CTRL DLY
AI OUT VERY HIGH
AI OUT HIGH LEVEL
Time
PFC_reference
(EXT 2)
44.17 PI
REF DEC
TIME
44.16 OUTLET FORCED REF
Time
1
0
, bit 4
Time
1
0
, bit 1
Time
1
0
, bit 3
Time
FAULT
44.10
AI MEASURE
OUTLET
NOT USED
AI1
AI2
AI3
Detection of high outlet pressure trips the drive on a fault.
Selects the analogue input for pump/fan outlet pressure supervision.
No analogue input selected.
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
AI5
AI6
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
44.11
AI OUT HIGH LEVEL Sets the supervision limit for the primary outlet pressure measurement. If the value of the selected analogue input exceeds this limit, the action defined by parameter 44.09
is taken after a delay set with parameter 44.15
expires.
0.0 … 100.0%
44.12
VERY HIGH CTRL
NOT SEL
The range corresponds to 0 … 10 V or 0 …20 mA on the analogue input. With a bipolar input, the absolute input value counts.
Enables, and selects the mode of, the secondary outlet pressure supervision function. The function uses the analogue input selected by parameter 44.10
.
Secondary outlet pressure monitoring not used.
4
3
4
1
2
5
6
0 … 100
1
Actual signals and parameters
136
Index Name/Selection
STOP
Description
Detection of very high outlet pressure stops the drive. The drive will start again if the pressure falls below the supervision level.
Detection of very high outlet pressure trips the drive on a fault.
FAULT
44.13
AI OUT VERY HIGH Supervision level for secondary outlet pressure monitoring function. See parameter 44.09
.
0 … 500% Supervision level.
44.14
DI STATUS OUTLET Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch at the pump/fan outlet. The “normal” state is 1 (on). If the selected input switches to 0 (off), the action defined by parameter 44.09
is taken after a delay set by parameter
44.15
expires.
NOT USED
DI1
No digital input selected.
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
DI10
DI11
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
DI12 Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through selected input.
44.15
OUTPUT CTRL DLY Sets the delay after which the action defined by parameter 44.09
is taken upon detection of high outlet pressure.
0 … 60 s Delay.
44.16
OUTLET FORCED
REF
This reference is used after detection of high outlet pressure. See par. 44.09
.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation using this reference.
FbEq
2
3
0 … 500
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
11
12
13
0 … 60
44.17
0 … 100%
PI REF DEC TIME
APPL OUTPUT
Forced reference.
PI controller ramp-down time. See selection PROTECT at parameters 44.01
and 44.09
.
PI controller ramp-down time.
0.01 … 3600.00 s
44.18
APPL PROFILE CTRL Parameters 44.18 to 44.20 provide the Application Profile protection feature, based on long-term monitoring of an internal status signal. If the selected signal exceeds (and remains above) the supervision limit for a longer time than the set delay (par.
), the internal status signal “PROFILE HIGH” is set to
1. The signal can be directed to a relay output (see parameter group
).
CONTROL DEV Signal
is monitored and compared to parameter
44.19
. Monitoring the deviation between the reference and the actual value gives an indication of the general condition of the pump, piping and valves.
APPL BLOCK OUTPUT is monitored and compared to parameter
44.19
. The signal constantly remaining at 100% may indicate a leak in the output piping.
44.19
PROFILE OUTP LIM Supervision limit for the Application Profile protection.
0 … 100
0 … 3600
0
65535
Actual signals and parameters
137
Index Name/Selection Description
0 … 500% Supervision limit.
44.20
PROF LIMIT ON DLY Delay time for the Application Profile protection.
0.0 … 100.0 h
44.21
PI REF FREEZE
Delay.
Freezes the input of the process PI controller. This feature is useful when the reference is based on an process actual value connected to an analogue input, and the sensor must be serviced without stopping the process.
The input of the PI controller is frozen as long as the selected digital input is
ON.
See also parameter 44.22
.
FbEq
0 … 500
0 … 100
PI
%ref
(EXT REF2)
01.12
44.22
NO
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
DI10
DI11
DI12
PI OUT FREEZE
40.01
40.02
40.03
PImax
PImin
01.16
The input of the process PI controller is not frozen.
Digital input DI1 ON: Input of the process PI controller frozen.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
Freezes the output of the process PI controller. This feature is useful when the reference is based on process actual value connected to an analogue input, and the sensor must be serviced without stopping the process.
The output of the PI controller is frozen as long as the selected digital input is
ON.
See also parameter 44.21
.
8
9
10
11
12
13
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
PI
%ref
(EXT REF2)
01.12
01.16
40.01
40.02
40.03
PImax
PImin
Actual signals and parameters
138
Index Name/Selection
NO
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
DI10
DI11
Description
The output of the process PI controller is not frozen.
Digital input DI1 ON: Output of the process PI controller frozen.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
DI12
45 FLOWCONTROL
See selection DI1.
Set-up of the Flow calculation function.
Note: The flow calculation is suitable for single-pump stations that are used to pump water.
Note: The flow calculation function is not to be used for invoicing purposes.
Enables/Disables the flow calculation function.
45.01
FLOW MODE
OFF
ON
Disabled
Enabled
45.02
SUM FLOW RESET Resets the total calculated flow counter (actual signal
OFF No reset.
1
2
ON
FLOW POINTER
Reset. The counter restarts from zero.
Source selected by parameter 45.34
.
45.03
MAX INLET
PRESSUR
Used to specify the maximum value of the inlet pressure sensor. This value is used in flow calculation when the Q-H performance curve of the pump is used.
See also parameters
.
0.00 … 10000.00 bar Maximum inlet pressure.
45.04
MAX OUTLET
PRESSU
Used to specify the maximum value of the outlet pressure sensor. This value is used in flow calculation when the Q-H performance curve of the pump is used.
See also parameters
.
0.00 … 10000.00 bar Maximum outlet pressure.
1
2
3
11
12
13
7
8
9
10
5
6
3
4
FbEq
1
2
1 = 0.1 bar
1 = 0.1 bar
Actual signals and parameters
139
Index
45.07
Name/Selection
Q1
Description
Flow rate (in cubic metres per hour) at point 1 on the Q-H performance curve.
…
define the Q-H performance curve of the pump for
the flow calculation function. The Q (flow rate) and H (head, or level) coordinates of five points on the curve are entered. The values are provided by the pump manufacturer.
Below is an example of a Q-H performance curve. The defining parameters of the first and last points are shown.
H [m]
4
5
3
FbEq
2
1
Q [m
3
/h]
0.0 … 10000.0 m
3
/h Flow rate at point 1.
45.08
H1
0.0 … 10000.0 m
Head (in metres) at point 1 on the Q-H performance curve.
Head at point 1.
45.09
Q2 Flow rate (in cubic metres per hour) at point 2 on the Q-H performance curve.
0.0 … 10000.0 m
3
/h Flow rate at point 2.
45.10
H2
0.0 … 10000.0 m
Head (in metres) at point 2 on the Q-H performance curve.
Head at point 2.
45.11
Q3 Flow rate (in cubic metres per hour) at point 3 on the Q-H performance curve.
0.0 … 10000.0 m
3
/h Flow rate at point 3.
1 = 0.1 m
1 = 0.1 m
1 = 0.1 m
1 = 0.1 m
3
3
/h
/h
1 = 0.1 m
3
/h
45.12
H3
0.0 … 10000.0 m
Head (in metres) at point 3 on the Q-H performance curve.
Head at point 4.
45.13
Q4 Flow rate (in cubic metres per hour) at point 4 on the Q-H performance curve.
0.0 … 10000.0 m
3
/h Flow rate at point 2.
45.14
H4
0.0 … 10000.0 m
Head (in metres) at point 4 on the Q-H performance curve.
Head at point 4.
45.15
Q5 Flow rate (in cubic metres per hour) at point 5 on the Q-H performance curve.
0.0 … 10000.0 m
3
/h Flow rate at point 5.
1 = 0.1 m
1 = 0.1 m
1 = 0.1 m
3
/h
1 = 0.1 m
3
/h
45.16
H5
0.0 … 10000.0 m
Head (in metres) at point 5 on the Q-H performance curve.
Head at point 5.
45.17
FLOW CALC MODE Defines whether the Q-H or Q-P performance curve is used for flow calculation.
Q-H CURVE The Q-H performance curve is used for flow calculation.
Note: This method entails the use of pressure sensors at both the inlet and the outlet of the pump.
1 = 0.1 m
1
Actual signals and parameters
140
Index Name/Selection
KW-Q CURVE
BOTH
45.18
Q H Q KW
BRKPOINT
0.00 … 1000.00 m
45.19
DENSITY
1.0 … 1000000.0
kg/m
3
45.20
PUMP KW1
Description
The Q-P performance curve is used for flow calculation.
Note: If the Q-P performance curve of the pump is flat, this method cannot be used.
Both the Q-H and Q-P performance curves are used for flow calculation. The transition point between the curves is set by parameter
Sets the transition point between the Q-H and Q-P performance curves. The
Q-P curve is used at heads higher than the value of this parameter.
Head breakpoint.
Defines the density of the fluid to be pumped for the flow calculation function.
Fluid density.
FbEq
2
3
1 = 1 m
1 =
0.1 kg/m
3
Power input (in kilowatts) of pump at point 1 on the Q-P performance curve.
…
define the Q-P performance curve of the pump for
the flow calculation function. The Q (flow rate) and P (power input) coordinates of three points on the curve are entered. The values are provided by the pump manufacturer.
Below is an example of a Q-P performance curve. The defining parameters of the first and last points are shown.
P [kW]
3
2
1
Q [m
3
/h]
0.0 … 10000.0 kW Power input of pump at point 1.
45.21
PUMP Q1 Flow rate (in cubic metres per hour) at point 1 on the Q-H performance curve.
0.0 … 10000.0 m
3
/h Flow rate at point 1.
45.22
PUMP KW2 Power input (in kilowatts) of pump at point 2 on the Q-P performance curve.
0.0 … 10000.0 kW Power input of pump at point 2.
45.23
PUMP Q2 Flow rate (in cubic metres per hour) at point 2 on the Q-H performance curve.
0.0 … 10000.0 m
3
/h Flow rate at point 2.
45.24
PUMP KW3 Power input (in kilowatts) of pump at point 3 on the Q-P performance curve.
0.0 … 10000.0 kW Power input of pump at point 3.
45.25
PUMP Q3 Flow rate (in cubic metres per hour) at point 3 on the Q-H performance curve.
0.0 … 10000.0 m
3
/h Flow rate at point 3.
45.26
EFFICIENCY Total efficiency of the motor/pump combination.
0.0 … 100.0% Efficiency.
45.27
PUMP NOM SPEED Defines the nominal speed of the pump in rpm.
0 … 10000 rpm Nominal speed of pump.
1 = 1 kW
1 = 1 m
3
/h
1 = 1 kW
1 = 1 m
3
/h
1 = 1 kW
1 = 1 m
3
/h
1 = 1%
1 = 1 rpm
Actual signals and parameters
141
Index Name/Selection
45.28
PUMP INLET SEL
Description
Selects the analogue input for pump inlet pressure measurement. See also parameter
No analogue input selected.
NOT SEL
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI5
Pump inlet pressure measured through selected input.
Pump inlet pressure measured through selected input.
Pump inlet pressure measured through selected input.
Pump inlet pressure measured through selected input.
AI6 Pump inlet pressure measured through selected input.
45.29
PUMP OUTLET SEL Selects the analogue input for pump outlet pressure measurement. See also parameter
NOT SEL
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI5
AI6
45.30
FLOW CALC GAIN
0.00 … 10.00
No analogue input selected.
Pump outlet pressure measured through selected input.
Pump outlet pressure measured through selected input.
Pump outlet pressure measured through selected input.
Pump outlet pressure measured through selected input.
Pump outlet pressure measured through selected input.
Flow calculation gain for possible calculation correction.
Calculation correction gain.
45.31
PUMP INLET DIAM
0.00 … 1000.00 m
The diameter of the pump inlet in metres.
Pump inlet diameter.
45.32
PUMP OUTLET DIAM The diameter of the pump outlet in metres.
0.00 … 1000.00 m Pump outlet diameter.
45.33
SENSOR HGT DIFF Height difference between the inlet and outlet pressure sensors.
0.00 … 1000.00 m Height difference.
45.34
FLOW RESET PTR
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
Defines the source for value FLOW POINTER
of parameter
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04
for information on the difference.
FbEq
4
5
6
1
2
3
3
4
1
2
5
6
1 = 1
1 = 1 m
1 = 1 m
1 = 1 m
Actual signals and parameters
142
Index Name/Selection
46 ANTI JAM
46.01
A JAM ENABLE1
Description
The parameters control the Anti-jam function.
Defines when the Anti-jam sequence can be carried out. See also parameter
The Anti-jam sequence consists of forward and reverse “steps”.
FbEq
Forward
]
Time
[
Reverse
[
[
]
] [
[
] [
WARNING! Before enabling the Anti-jam function, ensure it is safe to perform the Anti-jam sequence with the connected equipment.
Notes:
• The Anti-jam function overrides the parameter 10.03
DIRECTION .
• The Anti-jam function observes the maximum forward and reverse frequencies (parameters 20.01
and 20.02
).
• The Anti-jam function always uses acceleration time 2 (par. 22.04
) and deceleration time 2 (par. 22.05
).
• The drive must be started and its Run Enable signal present before the Antijam sequence can start.
NOT SEL
ENABLED
The Anti-jam function is disabled.
The Anti-jam sequence can be carried out when the drive is started and running.
The Anti-jam function is enabled by the source selected by parameter
3
1
2
AJAM POINTER
46.02
A JAM ENABLE MF Defines whether the Anti-jam sequence is to be carried out when the drive is the master or a follower in a Multipump configuration.
MASTER
FOLLOWER
The Anti-jam sequence can only be carried out when the drive is the master.
1
The Anti-jam sequence can only be carried out when the drive is a follower.
2
3 ENABLED The Anti-jam sequence can be carried out when the drive is either the master or a follower.
46.03
A JAM TRIGG MODE Defines how the Anti-jam sequence is triggered. Note that the conditions set by parameters
and
must be fulfilled before the sequence can start.
NOT SEL
MOT CURR LEV
DI1 TRIGG
No triggering source defined.
The Anti-jam sequence is triggered when the output current of the drive exceeds the limit defined by parameter
Switching on digital input DI1 triggers the Anti-jam sequence.
1
2
3
Actual signals and parameters
143
Index Name/Selection
DI3 TRIGG
IMOT OR DI1
Description
Switching on digital input DI3 triggers the Anti-jam sequence.
The Anti-jam sequence is triggered when the output current of the drive exceeds the limit defined by parameter
or digital DI1 is switched on.
IMOT OR DI3
AT START
TIMETRIGG R
The Anti-jam sequence is triggered when the output current of the drive exceeds the limit defined by parameter
or digital DI3 is switched on.
The Anti-jam sequence is performed every time the drive receives a Start command.
The Anti-jam sequence is started periodically at intervals defined by parameter
46.04
A JAM FWDSTEPLEV Forward step frequency for the Anti-jam sequence in percent of nominal motor frequency (parameter 99.07
).
0.0 … 200.0 % Forward step frequency.
46.05
A JAM REVSTEPLEV Reverse step frequency for the Anti-jam sequence in percent of nominal motor frequency (parameter 99.07
).
0.0 … 200.0 %
46.06
A JAM FWDSTEP
TIM
Reverse step frequency.
Defines the duration of each forward step in an Anti-jam sequence in seconds.
0.00 … 1000.00 s Forward step duration.
46.07
A JAM REVSTEP TIM Defines the duration of each reverse step in the Anti-jam sequence in seconds.
0.00 … 1000.00 s Reverse step duration.
46.08
A JAM STEP OFFTIM Defines the length of the interval between forward and reverse steps in the
Anti-jam sequence in seconds.
0.00 … 1000.00 s
46.09
A JAM I TRIGG LE
Step interval.
The output current limit for parameter 46.03
0.00 … 1000.00 A Current limit.
46.10
A JAM TIMETRIG LE
Time setting for parameter 46.03
0.00 … 200.00 h
46.11
A JAM COUNT
Time.
Number of steps to be performed in the Anti-jam sequence.
0 … 100 Number of steps.
46.12
A JAM ENB1 POINT
Defines the source for value AJAM POINTER
of parameter
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04
for information on the difference.
-
FbEq
4
5
6
7
8
0 … 200
0 … 200
0 … 1000
0 … 1000
0 … 1000
0 … 1000
0 … 200
0 … 200
Actual signals and parameters
144
Index Name/Selection
47 LEVEL CONTROL
47.02
PUMP DIRECTION
EMPTYING
Description
The parameters control the Level control function.
Only visible and effective when the Level control macro is selected.
FbEq
Defines whether the pump station is used for emptying or filling a tank.
The pump station is used for emptying a tank.
The diagram below shows the start, stop and supervision levels for emptying.
For simplicity, only three pumps are shown. Parameter
set to COMMON STOP; parameter
seconds.
1
Level (
High level 2 (
High level 1 (
Time
)
)
)
Frequency
Pump 3
High speed (
)
Efficiency speed (
)
Time
Frequency
Pump 2
High speed (
)
Efficiency speed (
)
Frequency
Pump 1
Time
High speed (
)
Efficiency speed (
)
Time
Actual signals and parameters
Index Name/Selection
FILLING
Description
The pump station is used for filling a tank.
The diagram below shows the start, stop and supervision levels for filling. For
simplicity, only three pumps are shown. Parameter 47.03
is assumed to be set to COMMON STOP; parameter
is assumed to be set to 0.00 seconds.
FbEq
2
Level (
High level 2 (
High level 1 (
Start 1 level (
145
Frequency
Pump 3
Frequency
Pump 2
Frequency
Pump 1
Start 2 level (
Time
Start 3 level (
)
)
High speed (
Efficiency speed (
)
Time
High speed (
Efficiency speed (
)
Time
High speed (
Efficiency speed (
)
47.03
CONTROL MODE
STABLE LEV
Time
Selects whether the pumps are stopped simultaneously or individually.
When the start level of a pump (parameters
…
master drive waits for the level delay (parameter
the pump.
1
Actual signals and parameters
146
Index Name/Selection Description
COMMON STOP All the pumps running will continue to run until the stop level (parameter
is reached. All pumps will then stop simultaneously.
47.04
LEVEL SOURCE SEL Selects the analogue input to which the level-indicating pressure sensor is connected. The level indicated by this sensor is visible as actual signal
NOT SEL
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI5
AI6
47.05
LOW LEVEL1
No level-indicating pressure sensor connected.
The level-indicating pressure sensor is connected to analogue input AI1.
The level-indicating pressure sensor is connected to analogue input AI2.
The level-indicating pressure sensor is connected to analogue input AI3.
3
4
1
2
5
6
FbEq
2
47.06
0.00 … 100.00 %
LOW LEVEL 2
NOT SEL
DI2_NO
The level-indicating pressure sensor is connected to analogue input AI5.
The level-indicating pressure sensor is connected to analogue input AI6.
Defines LOW LEVEL 1.
In emptying, if the measured level falls below LOW LEVEL 1, all pumps stop (if not stopped already).
In filling, if the measured level falls below LOW LEVEL 1, all pumps start running at the speed defined by parameter
.
See the diagrams at parameter 47.02
.
LOW LEVEL 1.
Selects a digital input for detecting LOW LEVEL 2.
In emptying, receipt of the LOW LEVEL 2 signal causes all pumps to stop (if not stopped already), and the drive to generate a warning.
In filling, receipt of the LOW LEVEL 2 signal causes all pumps to run at the
speed defined by parameter 47.21
, and the drive to generate a warning.
See the diagrams at parameter 47.02
.
No sensor connected.
1 = 1%
1
2
DI3_NO
DI5_NO
The LOW LEVEL 2 sensor is connected to digital input DI2. The sensor closes when the level is reached.
The LOW LEVEL 2 sensor is connected to digital input DI3. The sensor closes when the level is reached.
The LOW LEVEL 2 sensor is connected to digital input DI5. The sensor closes when the level is reached.
3
4
DI9_NO 5
47.07
47.08
DI2_NC
DI5_NC
DI9_NC
STOP LEVEL
0.00 … 100.00 %
START1 LEVEL
0.00 … 100.00 %
The LOW LEVEL 2 sensor is connected to digital input DI9. The sensor closes when the level is reached.
The LOW LEVEL 2 sensor is connected to digital input DI2. The sensor opens when the level is reached.
The LOW LEVEL 2 sensor is connected to digital input DI5. The sensor opens when the level is reached.
The LOW LEVEL 2 sensor is connected to digital input DI9. The sensor opens when the level is reached.
Defines the STOP LEVEL for the pump station. If parameter
is set to
STABLE LEV, pumps 3 and 2 are stopped when START3 LEVEL and START2
LEVEL are reached respectively; pump 1 will be stopped at STOP LEVEL. If parameter
is set to COMMON STOP, all pumps will continue to run until
the STOP LEVEL is reached. See the diagrams at parameter 47.02
.
STOP LEVEL.
Defines the start level for pump 1 (START1 LEVEL). See the diagrams at parameter
START1 LEVEL.
6
7
8
1 = 1%
1 = 1%
Actual signals and parameters
Index
47.09
47.10
47.11
47.12
Name/Selection
START2 LEVEL
0.00 … 100.00 %
START3 LEVEL
0.00 … 100.00 %
47.13
START6 LEVEL
47.14
47.15
0.00 … 100.00 %
START4 LEVEL
0.00 … 100.00 %
START5 LEVEL
0.00 … 100.00 %
START7 LEVEL
0.00 … 100.00 %
START8 LEVEL
0.00 … 100.00 %
47.16
HIGH LEVEL1
0.00 … 100.00 %
47.17
HIGH LEVEL 2
NOT SEL
DI2_NO
DI3_NO
DI5_NO
Description
Defines the start level for pump 2 (START2 LEVEL). This is also the stop level
for pump 2 unless COMMON STOP is selected at parameter 47.03
parameter
, and the diagrams at parameter
START2 LEVEL.
Defines the start level for pump 3 (START3 LEVEL). This is also the stop level
for pump 3 unless COMMON STOP is selected at parameter 47.03
parameter
, and the diagrams at parameter
FbEq
1 = 1%
START3 LEVEL.
Defines the start level for pump 4 (START4 LEVEL). This is also the stop level
for pump 4 unless COMMON STOP is selected at parameter 47.03
parameter
, and the diagrams at parameter
START4 LEVEL.
1 = 1%
1 = 1%
Defines the start level for pump 5 (START5 LEVEL). This is also the stop level
for pump 5 unless COMMON STOP is selected at parameter 47.03
parameter
, and the diagrams at parameter
START5 LEVEL.
Defines the start level for pump 6 (START6 LEVEL). This is also the stop level
for pump 6 unless COMMON STOP is selected at parameter 47.03
parameter
, and the diagrams at parameter
1 = 1%
START6 LEVEL.
Defines the start level for pump 7 (START7 LEVEL). This is also the stop level
for pump 7 unless COMMON STOP is selected at parameter 47.03
parameter
, and the diagrams at parameter
START7 LEVEL.
1 = 1%
1 = 1%
Defines the start level for pump 8 (START8 LEVEL). This is also the stop level
for pump 8 unless COMMON STOP is selected at parameter 47.03
parameter
, and the diagrams at parameter
START8 LEVEL.
1 = 1%
Defines HIGH LEVEL 1.
In emptying, if the measured level exceeds HIGH LEVEL 1, all pumps start
running at the speed defined by parameter 47.21
.
In filling, if the measured level exceeds HIGH LEVEL 1, all pumps stop (if not stopped already).
See the diagrams at parameter 47.02
.
HIGH LEVEL 1.
1 = 1%
Selects a digital input for detecting HIGH LEVEL 2.
In emptying, receipt of the HIGH LEVEL 2 signal causes all pumps to run at the
speed defined by parameter 47.21
, and the drive to generate a warning.
In filling, receipt of the HIGH LEVEL 2 signal causes all pumps to stop (if not stopped already), and the drive to generate a warning.
See the diagrams at parameter 47.02
.
No sensor connected.
The HIGH LEVEL 2 sensor is connected to digital input DI2. The sensor closes when the level is reached.
The HIGH LEVEL 2 sensor is connected to digital input DI3. The sensor closes when the level is reached.
The HIGH LEVEL 2 sensor is connected to digital input DI5. The sensor closes when the level is reached.
1
2
3
4
147
Actual signals and parameters
148
Index
47.18
Name/Selection
DI9_NO
DI2_NC
LEVEL DELAY
Description
The HIGH LEVEL 2 sensor is connected to digital input DI9. The sensor closes when the level is reached.
The HIGH LEVEL 2 sensor is connected to digital input DI2. The sensor opens when the level is reached.
Sets a delay for the STOP, START1, START2 and START3 levels. Whenever one of these levels is reached, this delay must elapse before any action is taken.
6
FbEq
5
47.19
0.00 … 100.00 s
RANDOM COEF
Level delay.
Randomises the START1, START2 and START3 levels (parameters
) to avoid caking on the walls of the tank. For example, if this parameter
is set to 10.00%, the actual start level is randomised between (STARTx LEVEL parameter value) - 10% and (STARTx LEVEL parameter value) + 10%.
Random coefficient.
0.00 … 10.00 %
47.20
EFFICIENCY SPEED Sets the “efficiency speed”, i.e. the optimal operating point of the pumps. A pump is run at this speed when the measured level is between the STARTx
LEVEL and HIGH LEVEL 1 of the pump. See the diagrams at parameter
1 = 1 s
1 = 1%
1 = 1% 0.00 … 100.00 % Efficiency speed.
47.21
HIGH LEVEL SPEED Sets a fixed reference speed for the pumps. This speed is used when the measured level exceeds (emptying) or falls below (filling) the level set by parameter
. See the diagrams at parameter
.
0.0 … 100.0 %
51 COMM MOD DATA
52 STANDARD
MODBUS
Fixed reference.
The parameters are visible and need to be adjusted, only when a fieldbus adapter module (optional) is installed and activated by parameter 98.02
. For details on the parameters, refer to the manual of the fieldbus module and the chapter
These parameter settings will remain the same even though the macro is changed.
The settings for the Standard Modbus Link. See the chapter
1 = 1%
52.01
STATION NUMBER
1 … 247
52.02
BAUDRATE
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
52.03
PARITY
NONE1STOPBIT
NONE2STOPBIT
ODD
EVEN
Defines the address of the device. Two units with the same address are not allowed on-line.
Address.
Defines the transfer rate of the link.
600 bit/s
1200 bit/s
2400 bit/s
4800 bit/s
9600 bit/s
19200 bit/s
Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting must be used in all on-line stations.
No parity bit, one stop bit.
No parity bit, two stop bits.
Odd parity indication bit, one stopbit.
Even parity indication bit, one stopbit.
1 … 247
4
5
6
1
2
3
3
4
1
2
Actual signals and parameters
Index Name/Selection
60 MASTER-
FOLLOWER
Description
Settings for Multipump Control.
FbEq
60.01
PUMP NODE
1 … 125 Node address.
60.02
FOLLOWER MODE Selects the source of reference when the drive is a follower.
AUTO
Node number for the drive on the Multipump link.
Note: Each drive on the Multipump link must be given a unique node number.
Note: If the drive is not given a priority class, this address is used in determining the starting order of pumps.
1 … 8
Drives are started and stopped by the Multipump control logic in the master drive. The master receives its reference from the PI controller.
When flow demand increases, new pumps are started. The latest drive to start becomes the master; at the same time, the previously-started drive becomes a
follower and starts to follow the reference defined by parameter 60.03
1
Frequency
149
Dr iv e
1
D riv e
2
D riv e
3
Flow demand
Drive 1
Master
Stopped
Drive 2
Stopped
Drive 3
Drive status
Follower
Master
See also the diagrams at parameter
Follower
Master
Actual signals and parameters
150
Index Name/Selection
SYNC
Description
The drive follows the same start/stop commands and reference (from the PI controller) as the master.
With the SYNC setting, the drive does not become master when started.
In this example, drive 1 is master; drives 2 and 3 have parameter
.
FbEq
2
Frequency
REF SYNC
Driv e 1/2
/3
Flow demand
Drive 1
Master
Follower
Drive 2
Follower
Drive 3
Drive status
The drive follows the same reference (from the PI controller) as the master, but is started and stopped by the multipump logic. This is usually the most economical follower mode.
3
Frequency
Dr iv e
1
D ri ve
2
D ri ve
3
Flow demand
Drive 1
Master
Stopped
Drive 2
Stopped
Drive 3
Drive status
Follower
Master
Follower
Master
In case the master status switches from one drive to another and the reference changes drastically, the drive compares the most recent reference value with the previous reference. If the difference between the references is more than
10%, the follower will accelerate/decelerate towards the new reference along a ramp. The acceleration and deceleration ramps are defined by parameters
respectively. The ramp-up or ramp-down will end when the new reference is reached.
Actual signals and parameters
Index Name/Selection
60.03
FOLLOWER REF
Description
Only visible when the Multipump macro is selected (parameter 99.02
is set to
).
This parameter defines the reference used when parameter 60.02
is set to
AUTO, and the drive is running as a follower.
The following diagram illustrates the starting of the drives in a typical multipump configuration as the reference (flow demand) first increases, then decreases. Follower start and stop delays (see parameters
) are ignored in this presentation.
FbEq
Reference
151
0 … 120 Hz
60.04
AUTOCHANGE
STYLE
Time
Drive 1
Freq.
Status (M = Master; F = Follower; S = Stopped)
M F
M
Start frequency 1 ( 41.12
)
Time
Drive 2
Freq.
Status (M = Master; F = Follower; S = Stopped)
F (S) M F M F (S)
)
Low frequency 1 ( 41.19
)
Time
Drive 3
Freq.
Low frequency 2 (
Time
Status (M = Master; F = Follower; S = Stopped)
F (S) M F (S)
Reference setting. This should generally be set at the optimal operating point of the pump.
Selects whether the Autochange function is used.
0 … 120
Actual signals and parameters
152
Index
60.07
60.08
Name/Selection
NO
FIXED
HOURCOUNT
ALL STOP
60.05
AUTOCHANGE
INTERV
3 … 12285 min
NUM PUMPS
ALLOWED
0 … 8
MASTER ENABLE
Description
Autochange disabled. When several pumps are running, the master is the drive with the highest node number (
Autochange will occur at intervals set by parameter 60.05
.
Note: The timing is based on the time the drives are powered (but not necessarily running).
1
The pumping duty is distributed among the pumps according to parameters
.
Note: The timing is based on the time the pumps are actually running.
Autochange will occur when all drives are stopped.
Specifies the Autochange interval for Multipump Control when parameter 60.04
is set to FIXED. The time elapsed since the last Autochange is indicated by actual signal
.
2
3
FbEq
0
1 = 1 min Autochange interval.
Note: Use intervals divisible by 3, i.e. 3,6,9,12, etc.
Defines the maximum number of pumps that can be run simultaneously in a
Multipump application. This number does not include drives running in SYNC
follower mode (see parameter 60.02
).
Maximum number of pumps.
Selects whether the drive is allowed to be the master drive in the Multipump configuration.
0 … 8
60.10
YES
NO
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
NO
SET
RESET
PUMP RUNTIME
0 … 8988479 h
60.11
PUMP RUNTIME
DIFF
The drive is allowed to be the master in the Multipump configuration.
The drive is not allowed to be the master in the Multipump configuration.
When the digital input is ON, the drive is allowed to be the master in the
Multipump configuration.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
DI10
DI11
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
DI12 See selection DI1.
60.09
PUMP RUNTIME SEL Controls the pump runtime setting.
1
2
3
12
13
14
Parameter
is read-only.
Parameter
can be adjusted. The setting will automatically revert to NO afterwards.
0
1
Resets parameter
. The setting will automatically revert to NO afterwards. 2
Pump runtime counter. Can be manually adjusted provided that SET is selected at parameter
Runtime counter.
1 = 1 h
Maximum pump runtime difference between drives. The application program
will compare the values of parameter 60.10
in each drive on the Multipump link and attempt to keep the runtime difference below this value.
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
Actual signals and parameters
153
Index Name/Selection
0 … 8988479 h
60.12
PUMP CLASS SEL
60.14
60.17
60.19
PAR CLASS1
PAR CLASS2
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
DI10
DI11
DI12
60.13
PUMP CLASS1
1 … 4
PUMP CLASS2
1 … 4
MASTER LOSS
CONST SPEED
Description
Runtime difference between drives.
Selects the start priority for the drive. The drive can be given a fixed priority, or a digital input can be used to switch between two priorities. Please note that the Autochange feature will attempt to equalise the duty between pumps with the same priority – not between pumps with different priorities.
Start priority defined by parameter 60.13
.
Start priority defined by parameter 60.14
.
The digital input selects between two pre-set priorities defined by parameters
. OFF = Pump class 1 (parameter 60.13
), ON = Pump class 2
).
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
See selection DI1.
Defines the priority for pump class 1.
Priority. 1 = highest priority = first to start.
Defines the priority for pump class 2.
Priority. 1 = highest priority = first to start.
In case the drive is a follower, cannot find a master on the Multipump link and is not itself allowed to be master, the drive will wait for the delay specified by parameter
, then proceed as defined by this parameter. A warning
The drive continues running and adopts the speed defined by parameter
12.04
.
FbEq
1 = 1 h
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
LAST SPEED
CNST SPEED
The drive continues to run at the last valid reference received from the master. 2
60.18
F T M COMM LOSS In case the drive is a follower on the Multipump link, and the master cannot receive messages from it, the drive will wait for the delay specified by parameter
, then proceed as defined by this parameter.
The drive starts (if not running already) and adopts the speed defined by parameter 12.04
.
1
LAST SPEED The drive continues to run according to the last valid reference received from the master.
2
SYNC SPEED
FOLL CTRL
COMM DELAY
0.0 … 3600.0 s
The drive starts (if not running already) and uses the speed reference received from the master.
The drive starts (if not running already) and follows the output of its own PI controller. Communication-wise, the drive remains a follower.
After the drive detects a master/follower communication break, it will wait until the delay specified by this parameter, then proceed as defined by parameter
(depending on the nature of the communication break).
Delay.
3
4
0 … 3600
Actual signals and parameters
154
Index
60.20
60.21
Name/Selection
ALL FOLL LOST
CONTINUE
RARE POLLING
MIN PUMP
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
60.22
INV ORDER CORR
Description
In case the drive is the master on a Multipump link, and does not receive messages from any of the followers, the drive will proceed as defined by this parameter.
No action taken.
FbEq
The drive switches to “rare polling”, i.e. starts to read and send messages at two-second intervals. The drive will revert to normal messaging after followers are detected. Note: Do not use this setting if the drives are connected in a ring; use “CONTINUE” instead.
Defines the minimum number of drives that can be run simultaneously in a
Multipump application. This number does not include drives running in SYNC
follower mode (see parameter 60.02
).
Note: If the value received from the pointer is less than 2, no minimum limitation exists.
Note: The drives that are kept running ignore the low (stop) frequencies
defined in parameter group 41 PFC-CONTROL 1 .
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04
for information on the difference.
-
0
1
OPT CONTROL
FORCED STOP
Whenever the application requires more pumping volume, additional drives are started. The starting order is dependent on the priority the drive is assigned to
(parameters
). Whenever several drives have the same priority,
the one with the lowest node number ( 60.01
) is started first by default.
The Autochange function can be used to automatically rotate the starting order within each priority group. Drives running before the Autochange may continue to run so that the new starting order cannot be applied immediately; this parameter defines the method with which the drive order of priority is corrected.
Example:
One pump is running. If necessary, additional pumps are started in the following order:
ID: 1
Priority: 1
Running
+
ID: 2
Priority: 1
+
ID: 3
Priority: 2
+
ID: 4
Priority: 2
+
ID: 1
Priority: 1
Running
+ +
Flow demand
While there is constant flow demand (and a pump must be running), the
Autochange function is activated, rotating the starting order within each priority.
After Autochange, the order is as follows:
ID: 2
Priority: 1
ID: 4
Priority: 2
ID: 2
Priority: 2
Flow demand
The desired order is, however, this:
ID: 2
Priority: 1
Running
+
ID: 1
Priority: 1
+
ID: 4
Priority: 2
+
ID: 2
Priority: 2
Flow demand
The setting of this parameter defines how the desired order is achieved. See the available selections below.
Drive order of priority is corrected only when the number of drives needs to be increased or decreased by the master as required by the process.
Drive order of priority is corrected as soon as possible by stopping low-priority drives. Higher-priority drives are then started as required by the process.
0
1
Actual signals and parameters
Index Name/Selection Description
60.23
RAMP ACCEL TIME Defines the acceleration time in case the latest reference received by the drive is higher than the previous reference. This is likely to happen when the master status is passed on from one drive to another. The parameter sets the ramp-up time as seconds from zero to maximum frequency (not from previous reference to new reference). See parameter
.
The parameter is effective only in the SYNC and REF SYNC follower modes.
0.1 … 3600.00 s Acceleration time.
60.24
RAMP DECEL TIME Defines the deceleration time in case the latest reference received by the drive is lower than the previous reference. This is likely to happen when the master status is passed on from one drive to another. The parameter sets the rampdown time as seconds from maximum frequency to zero (not from previous reference to new reference). See parameter
.
The parameter is effective only in the SYNC and REF SYNC follower modes.
0.1 … 3600.00 s Deceleration time.
FbEq
1 = 1 s
1 = 1 s
60.25
MASTER LOCATION Defines whether the master status is passed on with each started drive.
STABLE The first drive started will remain the master as long as possible, i.e. until, for example, the drive is no longer allowed to be master (see parameter
), or the drive trips on a fault.
IN STARTED
65 SHARE IO
The last-started drive that is allowed to be master by parameter
master.
Settings for shared analogue input signals.
0
1
65.01
SHARE IO ACTIVE
NO
YES
65.02
REPLACE IO
The analogue input (AI1 to AI3) signals connected to one drive can be read by the master and broadcast via the fibre optic link to all other drives. By default, the source is the drive with node address 1. If desired, the drive with node address 2 can be defined as a secondary source (parameter
whenever communication with node 1 fails.
Setting this parameter to YES enables input signal sharing. The shared data will then be visible as actual signals
,
. Note that the shared signals will only override the physical inputs of the drive if allowed by parameter
Input signal sharing disabled.
Input signal sharing enabled.
Defines which physical inputs of the drive are overridden by shared input values broadcast by the master. The shared input data takes preference over the physical inputs whose bit is set to 1.
1
2 bit 2 Analogue input AI3 bit 1 Analogue input AI2 bit 0 Analogue input AI1
00000xxx
0000000 … 11111111 Selector for drive inputs to be overridden by shared input data.
65.03
SECONDARY
SOURCE
Enables/disables the use of another drive (node 2) as a source of digital and analogue input signals in case communication with node 1 is lost. Reading the
inputs from node 2 is started after the delay defined by parameter 65.05
has elapsed.
This parameter is only effective when the drive is master.
NO
NODE 2
No secondary source is used.
If the drive with node address 1 is not available, the drive with node address 2 is used as the source of the analogue and digital input signals.
0
1
155
Actual signals and parameters
156
Index Name/Selection
65.04
SHARE IO COM
LOST
CONTINUE
CONST SPEED
Description
Defines the action to be taken in case the shared input values are not received.
The parameter applies regardless of whether the drive is the master (and does not receive messages from node 1, or node 2 if it is selected as a secondary source) or a follower (and does not receive messages from the master). In
either case, the drive will wait for the delay specified by parameter 65.05
proceed as defined by this parameter.
The drive will continue running based on the last valid data received.
The drive will continue running at the frequency defined by parameter 12.04
(constant frequency 3).
FAULT
The drive will trip and produce a fault ( SHARE IO COMM LOSS
).
65.05
IO COM LOST DELAY Delay for the communication loss function.
1.0 s … 3600.0 s
70 DDCS CONTROL
Delay.
Settings for the fibre optic channels 0, 1 and 3.
70.01
CH0 NODE ADDR
1 … 254
70.02
CH3 NODE ADDR
Defines the node address for channel 0. No two nodes on-line may have the same address. The setting needs to be changed when a master station is connected to channel 0 and it does not automatically change the address of the slave. Examples of such masters are an ABB Advant Controller or another drive.
Address.
Node address for channel 3. No two nodes on-line may have the same address. Typically the setting needs to be changed when the drive is connected in a ring which consists of several drives and a PC with the
DriveWindow
®
program running.
Address.
1 … 254
70.03
CH2 HW
CONNECTION
STAR
Defines the topology of the Multipump configuration.
The drives are connected in a star topology, i.e. through an NDBU-95 branching unit. Note: The NDBU-95 must have the REGEN communication mode enabled.
The drives are connected in a ring topology.
RING
83 ADAPT PROG CTRL
Control of the Adaptive Program execution. For more information, see the
Adaptive Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE 64527274 [English]).
83.01
ADAPT PROG CMD Selects the operation mode for the Adaptive Program.
STOP
START
EDIT
83.02
EDIT CMD
NO
Stop. The program cannot be edited.
Run. The program cannot be edited.
Stop to edit mode. The program can be edited.
Selects the command for the block placed in the location defined by parameter
83.03
. The program must be in editing mode (see parameter 83.01
).
Home value. The value automatically restores to NO after an editing command has been executed.
FbEq
1
2
3
1 = 1 s
1 … 125
1 … 254
1
65535
1
2
3
1
Actual signals and parameters
Index Name/Selection
PUSH
83.03
DELETE
PROTECT
UNPROTECT
EDIT BLOCK
0 … 15
83.04
TIMELEV SEL
12 ms
100 ms
1000 ms
83.05
PASSCODE
0 …
Description
Shifts the block in location defined by parameter 83.03 and the following blocks one location up. A new block can be placed in the emptied location by programming the Block Parameter Set as usual.
Example: A new block needs to be placed in between the current block number four (parameters 84.20 … 84.25) and five (parameters 84.25 … 84.29).
In order to do this:
- Switch the program to editing mode by parameter 83.01
.
- Select location number five as the desired location for the new block by parameter 83.03
.
- Shift the block in location number 5 and the following blocks one location forward by parameter 83.02
(selection PUSH).
- Program the emptied location number 5 by parameters 84.25 to 84.29 as usual.
Deletes the block in location defined by parameter 83.03
and shifts the following blocks one step down.
3
FbEq
2
Activation of the Adaptive Program protection. Activate as follows:
- Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is START or STOP (parameter
83.01
).
- Set the passcode (parameter 83.05
).
- Change parameter 83.02
to PROTECT.
When activated:
- All parameters in group 84 excluding the block output parameters are hidden
(read protected).
- It is not possible to switch the program to the editing mode (parameter 83.01
).
- Parameter 83.05 is set to 0.
Deactivation of the Adaptive Program protection. Deactivate as follows:
- Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is START or STOP (parameter
83.01
).
- Set the passcode (parameter 83.05
).
- Change parameter 83.02
to UNPROTECT.
Note: If the passcode is lost, it is possible to reset the protection also by changing the application macro setting (parameter 99.02
).
Defines the block location number for the command selected by parameter
83.02
.
Block location number.
4
5
1 = 1
Selects the execution cycle time for the Adaptive Program. The setting is valid for all blocks.
12 milliseconds
100 milliseconds
1000 milliseconds
Sets the passcode for the Adaptive Program protection. The passcode is needed at activation and deactivation of the protection. See parameter 83.02.
Passcode. The setting reverts to 0 after the protection is activated / deactivated. Note: When activating, write down the passcode and store it in a safe place .
1
2
3
157
Actual signals and parameters
84.02
FAULTED PAR
84.05
BLOCK1
OR
PI
PI-BAL
PI-NEG
RAMP
SR
SWITCH-B
SWITCH-I
TOFF
TON
TRIGG
ABS
ADD
AND
BWISE
COMPARE
COUNT
DPOT
EVENT
FILTER
MASK-SET
MAX
MIN
MULDIV
NO
158
Index Name/Selection
84 ADAPTIVE
PROGRAM
84.01
STATUS
Description
- selections of the function blocks and their input connections.
- diagnostics
For more information, see the Adaptive Program Application Guide (code:
3AFE 64527274 [English]).
Shows the value of the Adaptive Program status word. The table below shows the alternative bit states and the corresponding values on the panel display.
FbEq
Bit Display Meaning
0 1 Stopped
1 2
2 4
Running
Faulted
3 8
4 10
5 20
6 40
8 100
Editing
Checking
Pushing
Popping
Initialising
Points out the faulted parameter in the Adaptive Program.
Selects the function block for Block Parameter Set 1. See the Adaptive
Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE 64527274 [English]).
22
5
7
19
3
14
15
25
9
8
6
17
18
12
1
23
20
13
24
11
10
2
26
16
21
Actual signals and parameters
Index Name/Selection
XOR
84.06
INPUT1
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
Description
Selects the source for input I1 of Block Parameter Set 1.
Parameter index or a constant value:
- Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs.
- Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value
C to enable the constant setting.
Example: The state of digital input DI2 is connected to Input 1 as follows:
- Set this parameter to +.01.17.01. (The application program stores the state of digital input DI2 to bit 1 of actual signal 01.17.)
- For an inverted value, reverse the sign of the pointer value (-01.17.01.).
-
FbEq
4
Selects the source for input I2 of Block Parameter Set 1.
See parameter 84.06
.
-
84.07
INPUT2
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
84.08
INPUT3
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
84.09
OUTPUT
84.10
BLOCK2
84.11
INPUT1
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
84.12
INPUT2
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
84.13
INPUT3
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
84.14
OUTPUT
Selects the source for input I3 of Block Parameter Set 1.
See parameter 84.06
.
Stores and displays the output of Block Parameter Set 1.
See parameter 84.05
.
Selects the source for input I1 of Block Parameter Set 2.
See parameter 84.06
.
Selects the source for input I2 of Block Parameter Set 2.
See parameter 84.06
.
Selects the source for input I3 of Block Parameter Set 2.
See parameter 84.06
.
Stores and displays the output of Block Parameter Set 2.
… …
84.79
OUTPUT Stores and displays the output of Block Parameter Set 15.
85 USER CONSTANTS
Storage of the Adaptive Program constants and messages. For more information, see the Adaptive Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE
64527274 [English]).
-
-
-
-
85.01
CONSTANT1 Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program.
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value.
85.02
CONSTANT2 Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program.
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value.
85.03
CONSTANT3 Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program.
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value.
85.04
CONSTANT4 Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program.
159
Actual signals and parameters
160
Index Name/Selection Description
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value.
85.05
CONSTANT5 Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program.
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value.
85.06
CONSTANT6 Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program.
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value.
85.07
CONSTANT7 Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program.
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value.
85.08
CONSTANT8 Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program.
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value.
85.09
CONSTANT9 Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program.
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value.
85.10
CONSTANT10 Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program.
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value.
85.11
STRING1
MESSAGE1
Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block).
Message. The value can be edited using the DriveWindow
®
tool.
85.12
STRING2
85.13
MESSAGE2
STRING3
MESSAGE3
85.14
STRING4
Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block).
Message. The value can be edited using the DriveWindow
®
tool.
Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block).
Message. The value can be edited using the DriveWindow
®
tool.
85.15
MESSAGE4
STRING5
MESSAGE5
Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block).
Message. The value can be edited using the DriveWindow
®
tool.
Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block).
Message. The value can be edited using the DriveWindow
®
tool.
90 D SET REC ADDR
90.01
AUX DS REF3
- Addresses into which the received fieldbus data sets are written.
- Numbers of the main and auxiliary data sets.
The parameters are visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated by parameter 98.02
. For more information, see the chapter
Selects the address into which the value of fieldbus reference REF3 is written.
0 … 8999
90.02
AUX DS REF4
0 … 8999
90.03
AUX DS REF5
0 … 8999
90.04
MAIN DS SOURCE
1 … 255
90.05
AUX DS SOURCE
1 … 255
Parameter index.
Selects the address into which the value of fieldbus reference REF4 is written.
Parameter index.
Selects the address into which the value of fieldbus reference REF5 is written.
Parameter index.
Defines the data set from which the drive reads the Control Word, Reference
REF1 and Reference REF2.
Data set number.
Defines the data set from which the drive reads References REF3, REF4 and
REF5.
Data set number.
FbEq
0 … 8999
0 … 8999
0 … 8999
1 … 255
1 … 255
Actual signals and parameters
161
Index Name/Selection
92 D SET TR ADDR
92.01
MAIN DS STATUS
WORD
302 (fixed)
92.02
MAIN DS ACT1
0 … 9999
92.03
MAIN DS ACT2
0 … 9999
92.04
AUX DS ACT3
0 … 9999
92.05
AUX DS ACT4
0 … 9999
92.06
AUX DS ACT5
0 … 9999
Description
Main and Auxiliary Data Sets which the drive sends to the fieldbus master station.
The parameters are visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated by parameter 98.02
. For more information, see the chapter
.
Stores the address from which the Main Status Word is read from. Fixed value, not visible.
FbEq
302 Parameter index.
Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 1 is read to the Main Data
Set.
Parameter index.
Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 2 is read to the Main Data
Set.
Parameter index.
Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 3 is read to the Auxiliary Data
Set.
Parameter index.
Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 4 is read to the Auxiliary Data
Set.
Parameter index.
Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 5 is read to the Auxiliary Data
Set.
Parameter index.
0 … 9999
0 … 9999
0 … 9999
0 … 9999
0 … 9999
Actual signals and parameters
162
Index Name/Selection Description
95 HARDWARE SPECIFI
Miscellaneous hardware-related settings.
95.06
LCU Q POW REF Defines the reference value for the line-side converter reactive power generation. Line-side converter can generate reactive power to the supply network. This reference is written into line-side converter unit parameter 24.02
Q POWER REF2. For more information, see IGBT Supply Control Program 7.x
Firmware Manual [3AFE68315735 (English)].
Example 1: When parameter 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to PERCENT, value 10000 of parameter 24.02 Q POWER REF2 equals to value 100% of parameter 24.01 Q POWER REF (i.e. 100% of the converter nominal power given in signal 04.06 CONV NOM POWER).
Example 2: When parameter 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to kVAr, value
1000 of parameter 24.02 Q POWER REF2 equals to parameter 24.01 Q
POWER REF value calculated with the following equation: 100 · (1000 kVAr divided by converter nominal power in kVAr)%.
Example 3: When parameter 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to PHI, value
3000 of parameter 24.02 POWER REF2 equals approximately to parameter
24.01 Q POWER REF value calculated with the following equation:
FbEq
-10000...10000
95.07
LCU DC REF
0...1100 V
95.08
LCU PAR1 SEL
0…9999
95.09
LCU PAR2 SEL
0…9999
96 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
96.01
EXT AO1 SEL
NOT USED
SPEED
S
cos =
S
= -------------------------
P
2
+
Q
2
30°
P
Positive reference 30° denotes capacitive load.
Negative reference 30° denotes inductive load.
P = signal 01.09 POWER value
Q
Parameter 24.03 values are converter to degrees by the line-side converter
-30°/30°, since the range is limited to -3000/3000.
Reference value.
Defines the intermediate circuit DC voltage reference for the line-side converter. This reference is written into line-side converter parameter 23.01 DC
VOLT REF. For more information, see IGBT Supply Control Program 7.x
Firmware Manual [3AFE68315735 (English)].
Voltage.
Selects the line-side converter address from which the actual signal 09.12
LCU
ACT SIGNAL 1 is read from.
Line-side converter parameter index. For more information, see IGBT Supply
Control Program 7.x Firmware Manual [3AFE68315735 (English)].
Selects the line-side converter address from which the actual signal 09.13
LCU
ACT SIGNAL 2 is read from.
Line-side converter parameter index. For more information, see IGBT Supply
Control Program 7.x Firmware Manual [3AFE68315735 (English)].
Output signal selection and processing for the analogue extension module
(optional).
Only visible when the module is installed and activated by parameter.
See also parameter group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
.
Selects the signal connected to analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O extension module.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
1 = 1
1 = 1 V
0…9999
0…9999
1
2
Actual signals and parameters
Index
96.02
Name/Selection
FREQUENCY
CURRENT
TORQUE
POWER
DC BUS VOLT
OUTPUT VOLT
REFERENCE
CONTROL DEV
ACTUAL 1
ACTUAL 2
PICON OUTP
PICON REF
ACTUAL FUNC
COMM MODULE
EXT AO1 PTR
INVERT EXT AO1
Description
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
Source selected by parameter 96.11
.
Activates the inversion of analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O extension module.
NO
YES
Inactive
Active. The analogue signal is at a minimum level when the drive signal indicated is at its maximum and vice versa.
96.03
MINIMUM EXT AO1 Defines the minimum value for the analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O extension module.
Note: Actually, the setting 10 mA or 12 mA does not set the AO1 minimum but fixes 10/12 mA to actual signal value zero.
Example: Motor speed is read through the analogue input.
– The motor nominal speed is 1000 rpm (parameter 99.08
).
The analogue output value as a function of speed is shown below.
0
65535
13
14
15
16
17
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
FbEq
3
4
Analogue output
mA
20
4
3
2
12
10
1
4
2
1
Analogue output signal minimum
1
0 mA
2
3
4 mA
10 mA
4
12 mA
-1000 -500 0 500 1000
Speed/rpm
0 mA
4 mA
10 mA
12 mA
0 mA
4 mA
10 mA
12 mA
1
2
3
4
163
Actual signals and parameters
164
Index
96.04
96.05
Name/Selection
FILTER EXT AO1
0.00 … 10.00 s
SCALE EXT AO1
10 … 1000%
Description
Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O extension module. See parameter 15.04
.
Filtering time constant
Defines the scaling factor for analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O extension module. See parameter 15.05
.
Scaling factor
FbEq
0 … 1000
100 …
10000
96.06
EXT AO2 SEL
NOT USED
SPEED
FREQUENCY
CURRENT
TORQUE
POWER
DC BUS VOLT
OUTPUT VOLT
REFERENCE
CONTROL DEV
ACTUAL 1
ACTUAL 2
PICON OUTP
PICON REF
ACTUAL FUNC
COMM MODULE
Selects the signal connected to analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O extension module.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.01
.
See parameter 15.06
.
96.07
EXT AO2 PTR
INVERT EXT AO2
Source selected by parameter 96.12
.
Activates the inversion of analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O extension module. The analogue signal is at its minimum level when the drive signal indicated is at its maximum and vice versa.
Inactive NO
YES Active
96.08
MINIMUM EXT AO2 Defines the minimum value for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O extension module. See parameter
0 mA
4 mA
10 mA
12 mA
96.09
FILTER EXT AO2
96.10
0.00 … 10.00 s
SCALE EXT AO2
10 … 1000%
0 mA
4 mA
10 mA
12 mA
Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O extension module. See parameter 15.04
.
Filtering time constant
Defines the scaling factor for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O extension module. See parameter 15.05
.
Scaling factor
0
65535
1
2
3
4
0 … 1000
100 …
10000
13
14
15
16
17
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Actual signals and parameters
165
Index Name/Selection
96.11
EXT AO1 PTR
Description
Defines the source or constant for value
of parameter
FbEq
-
1000 =
1 mA
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
96.12
EXT AO2 PTR
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04
for information on the difference.
Defines the source or constant for value
of parameter
-
1000 =
1 mA
-255.255.31 …
+255.255.31 /
C.-32768 … C.32767
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04
for information on the difference.
98 OPTION MODULES
Activation of the option modules.
The parameter settings will remain the same even though the application macro is changed (parameter 99.02
).
98.02
COMM. MODULE
LINK
Activates the external serial communication and selects the interface. See the chapter
NO
FIELDBUS
ADVANT
1
2
3
STD MODBUS
CUSTOMISED
The drive communicates with a Modbus controller via the Modbus Adapter
Module (RMBA) in option slot 1 of the drive. See also parameter group
The drive communicates via a customer specified link. The control sources are defined by parameters 90.04
and 90.05
.
98.03
DI/O EXT MODULE 1 Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module 1 (optional) and defines the type and connection interface of the module.
See parameters 14.04 and 14.05 for selecting the drive states that are indicated through the relay outputs.
NO
RDIO-SLOT1
Inactive
Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive.
4
5
1 or 2
3
RDIO-SLOT2
No communication
The drive communicates via CH0 on the RDCO board (optional). See also
parameter group 51 COMM MOD DATA .
The drive communicates with an ABB Advant OCS system via CH0 on the
RDCO board (optional). See also parameter group
.
RDIO-DDCS
Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive.
4
Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic
DDCS link.
Note: Module node number must be set to 2. For directions, see User’s
Manual for RDIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64485733 [English]).
5
98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module 2 (optional) and defines the type and connection interface of the module.
See parameters 14.06 and 14.07 for selecting the drive states that are indicated through the relay outputs.
NO Inactive
RDIO-SLOT1
RDIO-SLOT2
Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive.
Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive.
4
1 or 2
3
Actual signals and parameters
166
Index
98.06
Name/Selection
RDIO-DDCS
AI/O EXT MODULE
NO
RAIO-SLOT1
Description
Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic
DDCS link.
Note: Module node number must be set to 3. For directions, see User’s
Manual for RDIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64485733 [English]).
Activates the communication to the analogue I/O extension module (optional), and defines the type and connection interface of the module.
Module inputs:
Values AI5 and AI6 in the drive application program are connected to module inputs 1 and 2.
See parameters 98.08
and 98.09
for the signal type definitions.
Module outputs:
for selecting the drive signals that are
indicated through module outputs 1 and 2.
Communication inactive.
Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive.
98.07
RAIO-SLOT2
RAIO-DDCS
COMM PROFILE
Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive.
Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic
DDCS link.
Note: Module node number must be set to 5. For directions, see User’s
Manual for RAIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64484567 [English]).
Defines the profile on which the communication with the fieldbus or another drive is based. Visible only when fieldbus communication is activated by parameter 98.02
.
ABB Drives communication profile. ABB DRIVES
CSA2.8/3.0
Communication profile used by application program versions 2.8 and 3.0.
98.08
AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC Defines the signal type for input 1 of the analogue I/O extension module (AI5 in the drive application program). The setting must match the signal connected to the module.
Note: The communication must be activated by parameter 98.06
.
UNIP AI5
BIPO AI5
Unipolar.
Bipolar.
98.09
AI/O EXT AI2 FUNC Defines the signal type for input 2 of the analogue I/O extension module (AI6 in the drive application program). The setting must match the signal connected to the module.
Note: The communication must be activated by parameter 98.06
.
UNIP AI6
BIPO AI6
99 START-UP DATA
Unipolar.
Bipolar.
Language selection. Definition of motor set-up data.
99.01
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH AM
DEUTSCH
ITALIANO
Selects the display language.
Note: Not all listed languages are necessarily supported.
International English.
American English. If selected, the unit of power used is HP instead of kW.
German.
Italian.
0
1
2
3
FbEq
5
1 or 2
3
4
5
1
2
1
2
0
65535
Actual signals and parameters
Index Name/Selection
ESPANOL
PORTUGUES
NEDERLANDS
FRANCAIS
DANSK
SUOMI
Description
Spanish.
Portuguese.
Dutch.
French.
Danish.
Finnish.
99.02
99.03
SVENSKA
CESKY
POLSKI
PO-RUS
APPLICATION
MACRO
MULTIMASTER
PFC TRAD
HAND/AUTO
LEVEL CTRL
USER 1 LOAD
USER 1 SAVE
USER 2 LOAD
USER 2 SAVE
APPLIC RESTORE
Swedish.
Czech.
Polish.
Russian.
Selects the application macro. See the chapter
for more information.
Note: When you change the default parameter values of a macro, the new settings become valid immediately and stay valid even if the power of the drive is switched off and on. However, backup of the default parameter settings
(factory settings) of each standard macro is still available. See parameter
99.03
.
10
11
12
13
Multipump control macro in use.
PFC TRAD macro in use.
Hand/Auto macro in use.
Level control macro in use.
User 1 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that the saved parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for the application.
Save User 1 macro. Stores the current parameter settings and the motor model.
Note: There are parameters that are not included in the macros. See parameter 99.03
.
User 2 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that the saved parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for the application.
Save User 2 macro. Stores the current parameter settings and the motor model.
Note: There are parameters that are not included in the macros. See parameter 99.03
.
Restores the original settings of the active application macro ( 99.02
).
- If a standard (i.e. other than a User) macro is active, the parameter values are restored to the default settings (factory settings). Exceptions: parameter settings in parameter group 99 remain unchanged. The motor model remains unchanged.
- If User Macro 1 or 2 is active, the parameter values are restored to the last saved values. In addition, the last saved motor model are restored. Exceptions:
Settings of parameters 16.05
and 99.02
remain unchanged.
Note: The parameter settings and the motor model are restored according to the same principles when a macro is changed to another.
6
7
8
3
4
1
2
5
NO
YES
No action.
Restore original settings.
99.04
MOTOR CTRL MODE Selects the motor control mode.
DTC Direct Torque Control. This mode is suitable for most applications.
0
65535
0
8
9
6
7
FbEq
4
5
167
Actual signals and parameters
168
Index
99.05
Name/Selection
SCALAR
MOTOR NOM
VOLTAGE
1/2 … 2 · U
N
Description
Scalar control. Use scalar control only in those special cases where DTC cannot be used. Scalar control mode is recommended
- for multimotor drives with variable number of motors
- when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of the drive (inverter)
- the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected.
Note: The outstanding motor control accuracy of the DTC cannot be achieved in scalar control. The differences between the scalar and DTC control modes are pointed out in this manual in relevant parameter lists. Some standard features are disabled in scalar control mode: Motor Identification Run (group
), Speed Limits (group
20 LIMITS ), Torque Limit (group 20
), DC Hold (group
21 START/STOP ), DC Magnetizing (group 21
START/STOP ), Speed Controller Tuning (group
Optimization (group 26 MOTOR CONTROL ), Flux Braking (group 26 MOTOR
CONTROL ), Underload Function (group
Phase Loss Protection (group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS
), Motor Stall Protection
(group
Defines the nominal motor voltage. Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate.
Voltage. Allowed range is 1/2 … 2 · U
N
of the drive.
Note: The stress on the motor insulations is always dependent on the drive supply voltage. This also applies to the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than the rating of the drive and the supply of the drive.
99.06
MOTOR NOM
CURRENT
Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate.
Note: Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 90 percent of the nominal current of the inverter.
0 … 2 · I
2hd
Allowed range: approx. 1/6
…
2 · I
2hd
of ACS800 (parameter 99.04
= DTC).
Allowed range: approx. 0 … 2 · I
2hd
of ACS800 (parameter 99.04
= SCALAR).
99.07
MOTOR NOM FREQ Defines the nominal motor frequency.
8 … 300 Hz Nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz typically)
FbEq
65535
1 = 1 V
1 = 0.1 A
800 …
30000
99.08
MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed. Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate. The motor synchronous speed or another approximate value must not be given instead!
Note: If the value of parameter 99.08
is changed, the speed limits in parameter group
change automatically as well.
1 … 18000 rpm
99.09
MOTOR NOM
POWER
Nominal motor speed
Defines the nominal motor power. Set exactly as on the motor rating plate.
0 … 9000 kW
99.10
MOTOR ID RUN
Nominal motor power
Selects the type of the motor identification. During the identification, the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. The ID
Run Procedure is described in the chapter
Start-up; and control through the
Note: The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) should be selected if:
- The operation point is near zero speed, and/or
- Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required.
Note: The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) cannot be performed if parameter 99.04
= SCALAR.
1 … 18000
0 … 90000
Actual signals and parameters
Index Name/Selection
NO
STANDARD
99.11
REDUCED
DEVICE NAME
Description
No ID Run. The motor model is calculated at first start by magnetising the motor for 20 to 60 s at zero speed. This can be selected in most applications.
Standard ID Run. Guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The ID Run takes about one minute.
Note: The motor must be de-coupled from the driven equipment.
Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run.
During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50 … 80% of the nominal speed during the ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO
RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
2
FbEq
1
Reduced ID Run. Should be selected instead of the Standard ID Run:
- if mechanical losses are higher than 20% (i.e. the motor cannot be decoupled from the driven equipment)
- if flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running (i.e. in case of a motor with an integrated brake supplied from the motor teminals).
Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run.
During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50 … 80% of the nominal speed during the ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO
RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
Defines the name for the drive or application. The name is visible on the control panel display in the Drive Selection Mode. Note: The name can be edited only by using a drive PC tool (e.g. DriveWindow
®
).
3
169
Actual signals and parameters
170
Actual signals and parameters
171
Fault tracing
Chapter overview
The chapter lists all warning and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions.
Safety
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive. The Safety
Instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual must be read before you start working with the drive.
Warning and fault indications
A warning or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status.
Most warning and fault causes can be identified and corrected using this information.
If not, an ABB representative should be contacted.
If the drive is operated with the control panel detached, the red LED in the panel mounting platform indicates the fault condition. (Note: Some drive types are not fitted with the LEDs as standard.)
The four digit code number in brackets after the message is for the fieldbus communication (see the chapter
How to reset
The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad RESET key, by digital input or fieldbus, or switching the supply voltage off for a while. When the fault has been removed, the motor can be restarted.
Fault history
When a fault is detected, it is stored in the Fault History. The latest faults and warnings are stored together with the time stamp at which the event was detected.
See the chapter
Fault tracing
172
Warning messages generated by the drive
WARNING
ACS 800 TEMP
(4210)
AI < MIN FUNC
(8110)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.01)
AUTOCHANGE
CAUSE
The drive temperature is excessive.
A warning is given if the inverter module temperature exceeds 115 °C.
An analogue control signal is below minimum allowed value. This can be caused by incorrect signal level or a failure in the control wiring.
WHAT TO DO
Check ambient conditions.
Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against unit power.
Check for proper analogue control signal levels.
Check the control wiring.
Check Fault Function parameters.
The autochange function is being performed.
Refer to the description of parameters 42.06 and 42.07.
Wait until download is completed.
BACKUP USED
CALIBRA REQ
CALIBRA DONE
CHOKE OTEMP
(ff82)
COMM MODULE
(7510)
(programmable
Fault Function)
EARTH FAULT
(2330)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.17)
F TO MS CM LOSS
(programmable
Fault Function
60.18)
ID DONE
A PC-stored backup of drive parameters is downloaded into use.
Calibration of output current transformers required. Displayed at start if drive is in scalar control (parameter
feature is on (parameter
).
Calibration of output current transformers completed.
Excessive temperature of drive output filter.
Supervision is in use in step-up drives.
Cyclical communication between the drive and the master is lost.
The load on the incoming mains system is out of balance. This can be caused by a fault in the motor, motor cable, or an internal malfunction.
In a Multipump configuration, the master does not receive messages from a follower.
The drive has performed the motor identification magnetisation and is ready for operation. This warning belongs to the normal start-up procedure.
Calibration starts automatically. Wait for a while.
Continue normal operation.
Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient temperature. Check filter fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely.
Check the status of fieldbus communication.
See the chapter
appropriate fieldbus adapter manual.
Check parameter settings:
- group 51 (for fieldbus adapter)
- group 52 (for Standard Modbus Link)
Check cable connections.
Check if the bus master is not configured, or does not send/receive messages.
Check motor.
Check motor cable.
Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor cable.
Check fibre optic cabling between the drives on the Multipump link. If the drives are connected in a ring, check that all drives are powered.
Continue drive operation.
Fault tracing
173
WARNING
ID MAGN
ID MAGN REQ
ID N CHANGED
CAUSE
Motor identification magnetisation is on. This warning belongs to the normal start-up procedure.
Motor identification is required. This warning belongs to the normal start-up procedure. The drive expects the user to select how the motor identification should be performed: By
Identification Magnetisation or by ID Run.
The ID number of the drive has been changed from 1.
ID RUN SEL
MOTOR TEMP
(4310)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.04 … 30.09)
Motor Identification Run is selected, and the drive is ready to start the ID Run. This warning belongs to the ID Run procedure.
Pressure at pump/fan inlet too low.
INLET LOW
INLET VERY LOW
(programmable
Fault Function
44.01 … 44.06)
MACRO CHANGE Macro is restoring or User macro is being saved.
MOTOR STALL
(7121)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.10)
The motor is operating in the stall region. This can be caused by excessive load or insufficient motor power.
MOTOR STARTS Motor Identification Run starts. This warning belongs to the ID Run procedure.
The motor temperature is excessive. This can be caused by excessive load, insufficient motor power, inadequate cooling or incorrect start-up data.
MS INV LOSS
(programmable
Fault Function
60.17)
OUTLET HIGH
OUTLET VERY
HIGH
(programmable
Fault Function
44.08 … 44.14)
The drive cannot detect a master on a
Multipump link, and is not itself allowed to become master.
Pressure at pump/fan outlet too high.
WHAT TO DO
Wait until the drive indicates that motor identification is completed.
Start the Identification Magnetisation by pressing the Start key, or select the ID Run and start (see parameter
).
Change the ID number back to 1. See the
Press Start key to start the Identification Run.
Check for a closed valve on the inlet side of the pump/fan.
Check piping for leaks.
Wait until the drive has finished the task.
Check motor load and the ratings of the drive.
Check Fault Function parameters.
Wait until the drive indicates that motor identification is completed.
Check motor ratings, load and cooling.
Check start-up data.
Check Fault Function parameters.
Check fibre optic cabling between the drives on the Multipump link.
Check that a sufficient number of drives are allowed to become master on the link.
Check piping for blocks.
Fault tracing
174
WARNING
PANEL LOSS
(5300)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.02)
REPLACE FAN
RUN DISABLE
SLEEP MODE
START
INTERLOCK
SYNCRO SPEED
THERMISTOR
(4311)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.04 … 30.05)
T MEAS ALM
UNDERLOAD
(ff6a)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.13)
CAUSE
A control panel selected as the active control location for the drive has ceased communicating.
Running time of the inverter cooling fan has exceeded its estimated lifespan.
No Run enable signal received.
WHAT TO DO
Check the panel connection (see the hardware manual).
Check control panel connector.
Replace control panel in the mounting platform.
Check Fault Function parameters.
Change the fan. Reset fan run time counter
Check the setting of parameter
. Switch on the signal or check the wiring of the selected source.
Refer to the description of parameter group 43.
The sleep function has entered the sleeping mode.
No Start Interlock signal received.
The value of the motor nominal speed set to parameter 99.08 is not correct: The value is too near the synchronous speed of the motor.
Tolerance is 0.1%.
The motor temperature is excessive. Motor thermal protection mode selection is
THERMISTOR.
Check the circuit connected to the Start
Interlock input on the RMIO board.
Check nominal speed from motor rating plate and set parameter 99.08 exactly accordingly.
Check motor ratings and load.
Check start-up data.
Check thermistor connections to digital input
DI6.
Motor temperature measurement is out of the acceptable range.
Motor load is too low. This can be caused by a release mechanism in the driven equipment.
Check connections of the motor temperature measurement circuit.
Check for a problem in the driven equipment.
Check Fault Function parameters.
Fault tracing
175
Warning messages generated by the control panel
WARNING
DOWNLOADING
FAILED
CAUSE
Download function of the panel has failed. No data has been copied from panel to drive.
WHAT TO DO
Make sure the panel is in local mode.
Retry (there might be interference on the link).
Contact ABB representative.
Check program versions (see parameter group
DRIVE
INCOMPATIBLE
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
DRIVE IS
RUNNING
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
NO
COMMUNICATION
(X)
Program versions in the panel and drive do not match. It is not possible to copy data from panel to the drive.
Downloading is not possible while the motor is running.
Cabling problem or a hardware malfunction on the Panel Link.
Stop motor. Perform downloading.
(4) = Panel type not compatible with version of the drive application program.
The Panel Link already includes 31 stations.
Check Panel Link connections.
Press RESET key. The panel reset may take up to half a minute, please wait.
Check panel type and version of the drive application program. The panel type is printed on the cover of the panel. The application program version is stored in parameter
Disconnect another station from the link to free an ID number.
NO FREE ID
NUMBERS ID
NUMBER
SETTING NOT
POSSIBLE
NOT UPLOADED
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
UPLOADING
FAILED
No upload function has been performed.
Perform the upload function before
Retry (there might be interference on the link).
Contact ABB representative.
WRITE ACCESS
DENIED
PARAMETER
SETTING NOT
POSSIBLE
Upload function of the panel has failed. No data has been copied from the drive to the panel.
Certain parameters do not allow changes while motor is running. If tried, no change is accepted, and a warning is displayed.
Parameter lock is on.
Stop motor, then change parameter value.
Open the parameter lock (see parameter
).
Fault tracing
176
Fault messages generated by the drive
FAULT
ACS 800 TEMP
(4210)
CAUSE
Excessive internal temperature. Trip level of inverter module temperature is 125 °C.
AI < MIN FUNC
(8110)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.01)
BACKUP ERROR
Analogue control signal is below minimum allowed value due to incorrect signal level or failure in the control wiring.
CTRL B TEMP
(4110)
BR BROKEN
(7111)
Failure when restoring PC-stored backup of drive parameters.
Control board temperature is lower than
-5 … 0 °C or exceeds +73 … 82 °C.
Brake resistor is not connected or it is damaged.
The resistance rating of the brake resistor is too high.
BC SHORT CIR
(7113)
Short circuit in brake chopper IGBT(s).
BR WIRING (7111) Wrong connection of brake resistor.
COMM MODULE
(7510)
(programmable
Fault Function)
CURR MEAS
(2211)
DC HIGH RUSH
(FF80)
WHAT TO DO
Check ambient conditions.
Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against unit power.
Check for proper analogue control signal levels.
Check control wiring.
Check Fault Function parameters.
Retry. Check connections. Check that parameters are compatible with drive.
Check air flow and fan operation.
Check the resistor and the resistor connection.
Check that the resistance rating meets the specification.
Cyclical communication with drive and master station is lost.
Current transformer failure in output current measurement circuit.
Drive supply voltage is excessive. When supply voltage is over 124% of the voltage rating of the unit (415, 500 or 690 V), motor speed rushes to trip level (40% of the nominal speed).
Replace brake chopper. Ensure brake resistor is connected and not damaged.
Check resistor connection. Ensure brake resistor is not damaged.
Check status of fieldbus communication. See the chapter
, or appropriate fieldbus adapter manual.
Check parameter settings:
- group 51 (for fieldbus adapter), or
- group 52 (for Standard Modbus Link)
Check cable connections.
Check if master can communicate.
Check current transformer connections to Main
Circuit Interface Board, INT.
Check supply voltage level, rated voltage of the drive and allowed voltage range of the drive.
Fault tracing
177
FAULT
DC OVERVOLT
(3210)
DC UNDERVOLT
(3220)
EARTH FAULT
(2330)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.17
EXTERNAL FLT
(9000)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.03)
FAN OVERTEMP
(ff83)
CAUSE
Excessive intermediate circuit DC voltage. DC overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 · U
U
1max
For is the maximum
500 V units, U
1max
1max, where value of the mains voltage range. For 400 V units, U
1max is 415 V. is 500 V. Actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the mains voltage trip level is 728 VDC for 400 V units and 877 VDC for 500 V units.
Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient due to missing mains phase, a blown fuse or a rectifier bridge internal fault.
WHAT TO DO
Check that the overvoltage controller is on
(Parameter 20.05).
Check mains for static or transient overvoltage.
Check brake chopper and resistor (if used).
Check deceleration time.
Use coast-to-stop function (if applicable).
Retrofit the frequency converter with a brake chopper and a brake resistor.
Check mains supply and fuses.
DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.65 · U
1min, is the minimum value of the mains where
U
1min voltage range. For 400 V and 500 V units,
U
1min is 380 V. Actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the mains voltage trip level is 334 VDC
Load on the incoming mains system is out of balance due to fault in the motor, motor cable or an internal malfunction.
Fault in one of the external devices.
(This information is configured through one of the programmable digital inputs.)
Check motor.
Check motor cable.
Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor cable.
Check external devices for faults.
Check parameter 30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT.
ID RUN FAIL
IN CHOKE TEMP
(ff81)
INLET LOW
INLET VERY LOW
(programmable
Fault Function
44.01 … 44.06)
Excessive temperature of drive output filter fan.
Supervision is in use in step-up drives.
Motor ID Run is not completed successfully.
Excessive input choke temperature.
Pressure at pump/fan inlet too low.
Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient temperature. Check fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely.
Check maximum speed (Parameter 20.02). It should be at least 80% of the nominal speed of the motor (Parameter 99.08).
Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient temperature. Check that fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely.
Check for a closed valve on the inlet side of the pump/fan.
Check piping for leaks.
Fault tracing
178
FAULT
I/O COMM ERR
(7000)
LINE CONV (ff51)
MOTOR PHASE
(ff56)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.16)
MOTOR TEMP
(4310)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.04 … 30.09)
MOTOR STALL
(7121)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.10 … 30.12)
MS INV LOSS
(programmable
Fault Function
60.17)
CAUSE
Communication error on the control board, channel CH1.
Electromagnetic interference.
Fault on the line side converter.
One of the motor phases is lost due to fault in the motor, motor cable, thermal relay (if used) or internal fault.
WHAT TO DO
Check connections of fibre optic cables on channel CH1.
Check all I/O modules (if present) connected to channel CH1.
Check for proper earthing of the equipment.
Check for highly emissive components nearby.
Shift panel from motor-side converter control board to line-side converter control board.
See line side converter manual for fault description.
Check motor and motor cable.
Check thermal relay (if used).
Check Fault Function parameters. Disable this protection.
Motor temperature is too high (or appears to be too high) due to excessive load, insufficient motor power, inadequate cooling or incorrect start-up data.
Motor is operating in the stall region due to e.g. excessive load or insufficient motor power.
Check motor ratings and load.
Check start-up data.
Check Fault Function parameters.
Check motor load and the drive ratings.
Check Fault Function parameters.
NO MOT DATA
(ff52)
OUTLET HIGH
OUTLET VERY
HIGH
(programmable
Fault Function
44.08 … 44.14)
OVERCURRENT
(2310)
The drive cannot detect a master on a
Multipump link, and is not itself allowed to become master.
Motor data is not given or motor data does not match with inverter data.
Pressure at pump/fan outlet too high.
Output current is excessive. Overcurrent trip limit is 1.65 … 3.5 · I type.
max
depending on drive
Check fibre optic cabling between the drives on the Multipump link. If the drives are connected in a ring, check that all drives are powered.
Check that a sufficient number of drives are allowed to become master on the link.
Check motor data given by parameters
99.04 … 99.09.
Check piping for blocks.
Check motor load.
Check acceleration time.
Check motor and motor cable (including phasing).
Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor cable.
Check encoder cable (including phasing).
Fault tracing
179
FAULT CAUSE
OVERFREQ (7123) Motor is turning faster than the highest allowed speed due to incorrectly set minimum/ maximum speed, insufficient braking torque or changes in the load when using torque reference.
PANEL LOSS
(5300)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.02)
Trip level is 40 Hz over the operating range absolute maximum speed limit (Direct Torque
Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar
Control active). The operating range limits are set by parameters 20.01 and 20.02 (DTC mode active) or 20.07 and 20.08 (Scalar
Control active).
A control panel or DriveWindow
®
selected as active control location for the drive has ceased communicating.
PPCC LINK (5210)
RUN DISABLE
SC (INU 1)
SC (INU 2)
SC (INU 3)
SC (INU 4)
SHARE IO COMM
LOSS
SHORT CIRC
(2340)
SLOT OVERLAP
START INHIBIT
(ff7a)
Fibre optic link to the INT board is faulty.
No Run enable signal received.
Short circuit in inverter unit of several parallel inverter modules. The number refers to the faulty inverter module number.
INT board fibre optic connection fault in inverter unit consisting of several parallel inverter modules. The number refers to the inverter module number.
Analogue input data sharing is enabled but no data can be received.
Short-circuit in the motor cable(s) or motor.
Output bridge of the converter unit is faulty.
Two option modules have the same connection interface selection.
Optional start inhibit hardware logic is activated.
WHAT TO DO
Check minimum/maximum speed settings.
Check adequacy of motor braking torque.
Check applicability of torque control.
Check need for a brake chopper and resistor(s).
Check panel connection (see appropriate hardware manual).
Check control panel connector.
Replace control panel in the mounting platform.
Check Fault Function parameters.
Check DrivesWindow connection.
Check fibre optic cables.
Check the setting of parameter
. Switch on the signal or check the wiring of the selected source.
Check motor and motor cable.
Check power semiconductors (IGBT power plates) of inverter module. (INU 1 stands for inverter module 1 etc.).
Check connection from inverter module Main
Circuit Interface Board, INT to PPCC
Branching Unit, PBU. (Inverter module 1 is connected to PBU CH1 etc.)
Check the fibre optic cabling between the drives.
Check the analogue input signal wiring.
Check motor and motor cable.
Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor cable.
Consult ABB representative.
Check connection interface selections in group
.
Check start inhibit circuit (GPS board).
Fault tracing
180
FAULT
START SEL
WRONG
SUPPLY PHASE
(3130)
THERMISTOR
(4311)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.04 … 30.05)
UNDERLOAD
(ff6a)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.13 … 30.15)
USER MACRO
THERMAL MODE
CAUSE
A pulse-type start/stop command is selected for external control location 2 (EXT2) when either the Multipump or Level control macro is active.
Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to a missing supply phase, a blown fuse or a rectifier bridge internal fault.
A trip occurs when the DC voltage ripple is 13 percent of the DC voltage.
Excessive motor temperature (detected by the motor thermal protection function, which has selection THERMISTOR active) .
WHAT TO DO
Select a non-pulse start/stop source at parameter
Check mains fuses.
Check for mains supply imbalance.
Check motor ratings and load.
Check start-up data.
Check thermistor connections.
Check thermistor cabling.
Motor load is too low due to e.g. release mechanism in the driven equipment.
No User Macro saved or the file is defective.
Motor thermal protection mode is set to DTC for a high-power motor.
Check for a problem in the driven equipment.
Check Fault Function parameters.
Create User Macro.
.
Fault tracing
Pump control application examples
Overview
This chapter contains the following pump control application examples:
• 2-pump station with 1 drive
• Multipump configuration with 2 (or more) drives
• Level control configuration with 2 (or more) drives
• Pump station remote-controlled through the Internet.
181
Pump control application examples
182
2-pump station with 1 drive
The pumps are used for pressure boosting. Pump alternation and sleep function are used. The application also includes the following additional features:
• Manual control switches for selection between conventional PFC control and direct-on-line connection of the motors (S1, S2). The switches are of the threeposition type:
A = PFC control in use.
0 = Motor is off.
H = PFC control is by-passed and motor is connected direct-on-line.
• Drive start inhibit switch (S3).
Mains Supply
400 V/50 Hz
Alternation
Switchgear
Cabinet
M1
M1, M2:
7.5 kW
1450 rpm
14.8 A
M2
Outlet Pressure
Transducer
Inlet Pressure
Transducer
Pump control application examples
Sheet 1 of 3
183
Pump control application examples
184
Sheet 2 of 3
Pump control application examples
Sheet 3 of 3 (Pressure sensor connection examples)
P
I
+
–
0/4…20 mA
X21 / RMIO Board
5
6
AI2+
AI2-
Actual value measurement. 4…20 mA.
R
in
= 100 ohm
Note: The sensor must be powered externally.
P
I
OUT
+
–
0/4…20 mA
X21 / RMIO Board
5
6
AI2+
AI2-
Actual value measurement. 4…20 mA.
R
in
= 100 ohm
X23 / RMIO Board
1
2
+24V
GND
Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated.
24 VDC, 250 mA
P
I
–
+
4…20 mA
X21 / RMIO Board
5
6
AI2+
AI2-
Actual value measurement. 4…20 mA.
R
in
= 100 ohm
X23 / RMIO Board
1
2
+24V
GND
Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated.
24 VDC, 250 mA
P
I
–
+
4…20 mA
Power supply
+24V
–
Drive 1 / X21 / RMIO Board
5
6
AI2+
AI2-
Actual value measurement. 4…20 mA.
R
in
= 100 ohm
Drive 2 / X21 / RMIO Board
5
6
AI2+
AI2-
Actual value measurement. 4…20 mA.
R
in
= 100 ohm
Drive 3 / X21 / RMIO Board
5
6
AI2+
AI2-
Actual value measurement. 4…20 mA.
R
in
= 100 ohm
185
Pump control application examples
186
Multipump configuration with 2 (or more) drives
Wiring diagram
Pump control application examples
Optical fibre connections
Ring
P a r . 6 0 . 0 1 P U M P N O D E : 1
P a r . 6 0 . 0 1 P U M P N O D E : 2
P a r . 7 0 . 0 3 C H 2 H W C O N N . : R I N G
P a r . 7 0 . 0 3 C H 2 H W C O N N . : R I N G
A C S 8 0 0 A C S 8 0 0
C o n t r o l C a r d R M I O - X X C o n t r o l C a r d R M I O - X X
C H 2
R D C O - 0 3
C H 2
R D C O - 0 3
P a r . 6 0 . 0 1 P U M P N O D E : 3
P a r . 7 0 . 0 3 C H 2 H W C O N N . : R I N G
A C S 8 0 0
C o n t r o l C a r d R M I O - X X
C H 2
R D C O - 0 3
187
Star
P a r . 6 0 . 0 1 P U M P N O D E : 1
P a r . 6 0 . 0 1 P U M P N O D E : 2 P a r . 6 0 . 0 1 P U M P N O D E : 3
P a r . 7 0 . 0 3 C H 2 H W C O N N . : S T A R
P a r . 7 0 . 0 3 C H 2 H W C O N N . : S T A R P a r . 7 0 . 0 3 C H 2 H W C O N N . : S T A R
A C S 8 0 0 A C S 8 0 0 A C S 8 0 0
C o n t r o l C a r d R M I O - X X C o n t r o l C a r d R M I O - X X C o n t r o l C a r d R M I O - X X
C H 2
R D C O - 0 3
C H 2
R D C O - 0 3
C H 2
R D C O - 0 3
M A S T E R C H 0 C H 1 C H 2
X 1 3
3 4
R E G E N
C H 3 C H 4 C H 5
N D B U - 9 5
C H 6 C H 7 C H 8
X 1
E x t e r n a l
Pump control application examples
188
Level control configuration with 2 drives
Wiring diagram
Pump control application examples
189
Pump station remote-controlled through the Internet
Pump stations are often located in remote sites and far from supervisory sites. The
PSA-01 Server is a device that can be used to control remote stations through the
Internet in order to cut maintenance costs. The PSA-01 maintains a database of data and alarms it receives from the monitored stations, and informs service personnel through SMS (Short Message Service) in case something goes wrong with any of the stations.
The PSA-01 has built-in web pages that enable easy system configuration and access to the database. These features can also be used by the local or global ABB support if necessary.
The picture below presents the system architecture. The system components are as follows:
PSA-01 Server
• Web interface for configuring the system and browsing the database
• GSM module for sending SMS messages to service personnel (SIM card required)
• Email system for sending and receiving email messages
• Provision to export database information
• Access to the NETA-01 Ethernet Adapter Module
• Username and password protection for each pump station
NETA-01 Intelligent Ethernet Adapter
• Built-in web pages for parameter adjustment, monitoring, and diagnosing of the drive over the Internet
• Email client for sending predefined emails to the PSA-01 Server
• Modbus TCP interface for control
• Can be used with LAN, WLAN, analogue modem, xDSL and GPRS
Supervisory site
• Standard PC with an Internet browser needed to access the PSA-01 Server and the Java Virtual Machine (free plugin) to use the NETA-01
• Mobile phones for service personnel
• PSA-01 Server that can receive emails from multiple stations
Optional ABB remote support
• Standard PC that can be used to access the PSA-01 Server database, and drive settings via the NETA-01 Ethernet Adapter
Pump control application examples
190
Alternatively, Modbus TCP master software or hardware can be used to monitor remote stations. The Modbus TCP master can use the OPC interface for client application to ease integration. This option is also shown in the picture below.
Pump control application examples
191
Fieldbus control
Chapter overview
The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network.
System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system – usually a fieldbus controller – via an adapter module connected to fibre optic cable CH0 on the RDCO communication module (optional). For connection to an Advant Fieldbus 100 system, an external AF 100 interface is used.
Fieldbus
Controller
Fieldbus
ACS800
Other devices
RMBA-0x Adapter
Std. Modbus Link
Slot 1 or 2
RDCO Comm.
Module
CH0
(DDCS)
Fieldbus Adapter
Nxxx or
AF 100 Interface
(eg. AC 80)
Data Flow
Control Word (CW)
References (REF1…REF5)
Status Word (SW)
Actual Values (ACT1…ACT5)
Parameter R/W Requests/Responses
Figure 1 Fieldbus control.
Process I/O (Cyclic)
Service Messages (Acyclic)
Fieldbus control
192
The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface, or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other available sources, e.g. digital and analogue inputs.
Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module
Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control, the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the
Hardware Manual of the drive, and the module manual.
The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module is then activated by setting parameter
. After the communication is initialised, the configuration parameters of the module become available in the drive at parameter group 51.
Table 1 Communication set-up parameters for fieldbus adapter connection.
Parameter Alternative settings
Setting for fieldbus control
Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION
NO; FIELDBUS;
ADVANT; STD
MODBUS;
CUSTOMISED
ABB DRIVES;
CSA 2.8/3.0
FIELDBUS
ABB DRIVES
Initialises communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module. Activates module set-up parameters (Group 51).
Selects the communication profile used by the drive. See section Communication
Profiles below.
ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION
51.01 MODULE TYPE
51.02 (FIELDBUS
PARAMETER 2)
• • •
– – Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter module.
These parameters are adapter module-specific. For more information, see the module manual.
Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily visible.
51.26 (FIELDBUS
PARAMETER 26)
51.27 FBA PAR
REFRESH*
(0) DONE;
(1) REFRESH
–
51.28 FILE CPI FW
REV* xyz (binary coded decimal
–
Validates any changed adapter module configuration parameter settings. After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to DONE.
Displays the required CPI firmware revision of the fieldbus adapter as defined in the configuration file stored in the memory of the drive. The CPI firmware version of the fieldbus adapter (refer to par. 51.32) must contain the same or a later CPI version to be compatible. x = major revision number;
y = minor revision number; z = correction number. Example: 107 = revision 1.07.
Fieldbus control
193
Parameter
51.29 FILE CONFIG
ID*
51.30 FILE CONFIG
REV*
51.31 FBA STATUS
51.32 FBA CPI FW
REV
Alternative settings
xyz (binary coded decimal) xyz (binary coded decimal)
(0) IDLE;
(1) EXEC. INIT;
(2) TIME OUT;
(3) CONFIG
ERROR;
(4) OFF-LINE;
(5) ON-LINE;
(6) RESET
–
Setting for fieldbus control
–
–
–
–
Function/Information
Displays the fieldbus adapter module configuration file identification stored in the memory of the drive. This information is drive application program-dependent.
Displays the fieldbus adapter module configuration file revision stored in the memory of the drive. x = major revision number; y = minor revision number;
z = correction number. Example: 1 = revision 0.01.
Displays the status of the adapter module.
IDLE = Adapter not configured.
EXEC. INIT = Adapter initialising.
TIME OUT = A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive.
CONFIG ERROR = Adapter configuration error. The major or minor revision code of the CPI firmware revision stored in the adapter differs from that stated in the configuration file in the memory of the drive.
OFF-LINE = Adapter is off-line.
ON-LINE = Adapter is on-line.
RESET = Adapter performing a hardware reset.
Displays the CPI program revision of the module inserted in slot 1. x = major revision number; y = minor revision number;
z = correction number. Example: 107 = revision 1.07.
51.33 FBA APPL FW
REV
– – Displays the application program revision of the module inserted in slot 1. x = major revision number; y = minor revision number; z = correction number. Example:
107 = revision 1.07.
*Parameters 51.27 to 51.33 are only visible with a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter installed.
After the parameters in group 51 have been set, the drive control parameters (shown
in Table 4 ) must be checked and adjusted where necessary.
The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up.
Fieldbus control
194
Parameter
Control through the Standard Modbus Link
An RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter installed in slot 1 or 2 of the drive forms an interface called the Standard Modbus Link. The Standard Modbus Link can be used for external control of the drive by a Modbus controller (RTU protocol only).
It is possible to switch the control between the Standard Modbus Link and another fieldbus adapter, in which case the RMBA-01 is installed in slot 2, the fieldbus adapter in slot 1.
Communication set-up
The communication through the Standard Modbus Link is initialised by setting parameter
to STD MODBUS. Then, the communication parameters in group
52 must be adjusted. See the table below.
Table 2 Communication set-up parameters for the Standard Modbus Link.
Alternative
Settings
Setting for Control through the Standard
Modbus Link
Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION
NO; FIELDBUS;
ADVANT; STD
MODBUS;
CUSTOMISED
ABB DRIVES;
CSA 2.8/3.0
STD MODBUS
ABB DRIVES
Initialises communication between drive
(Standard Modbus Link) and Modbusprotocol controller. Activates communication parameters in group 52.
Selects the communication profile used by the drive. See section Communication
Profiles below.
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
1 to 247
600; 1200; 2400;
4800; 9600; 19200
ODD; EVEN;
NONE1STOPBIT;
NONE2STOPBIT
–
–
–
Specifies the station number of the drive on the Standard Modbus Link.
Communication speed for the Standard
Modbus Link.
Parity setting for the Standard Modbus
Link.
After the parameters in group 52 have been set, the drive control parameters (shown in
Table 4 ) should be checked and adjusted where necessary.
Fieldbus control
195
Modbus addressing
In the Modbus controller memory, the Control Word, the Status Word, the references, and the actual values are mapped as follows:
Data from fieldbus controller to drive
Address Contents
Data from drive to fieldbus controller
Address Contents
40001
40002
40003
Control Word
Reference 1
Reference 2
40004
40005
40006
Status Word
Actual 1
Actual 2
40007
40008
40009
Reference 3
Reference 4
Reference 5
40010
40011
40012
Actual 3
Actual 4
Actual 5
More information on Modbus communication is available from the Modicon website
http:\\www.modicon.com.
Fieldbus control
196
Setting up an Advant Fieldbus 100 (AF 100) connection
The connection of a drive to an AF (Advant Fieldbus) 100 bus is similar to other fieldbusses, with the exception that one of the AF 100 interfaces listed below is substituted for the fieldbus adapter. The AF 100 interface is connected to channel
CH0 on the RDCO board inside the drive using fibre optic cables.
The following is a list of suitable AF 100 interfaces:
• CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI)
TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required
• Advant Controller 70 (AC 70)
TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required
• Advant Controller 80 (AC 80)
Optical ModuleBus connection: TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical
ModuleBus Port Interface required
DriveBus connection: Connectible to RMIO-01/02 Board with RDCO-01
Communication Option.
One of the above interfaces may already be present on the AF 100 bus. If not, an
Advant Fieldbus 100 Adapter kit (NAFA-01) is separately available, containing the
CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface, TB810 and TB811 Optical ModuleBus
Port Interfaces, and a TC505 Trunk Tap. (More information on these components is available from the S800 I/O User’s Guide, 3BSE 008 878 [ABB Industrial Systems,
Västerås, Sweden]).
Optical component types
The TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port Interface is equipped with 5 MBd optical components, while the TB810 has 10 MBd components. All optical components on a fibre optic link must be of the same type since 5 MBd components do not communicate with 10 MBd components. The choice between TB810 and TB811 depends on the equipment it is connected to.
The TB811 (5 MBd) should be used when connecting to a drive with the following equipment:
• RMIO-01/02 Board with RDCO-02 Communication Option
• RMIO-01/02 Board with RDCO-03 Communication Option.
The TB810 (10 MBd) should be used when connecting to the following equipment:
• RMIO-01/02 Board with RDCO-01 Communication Option
• NDBU-85/95 DDCS Branching Units.
Fieldbus control
197
Parameter
Communication Set-up
The communication between the drive and the AF 100 interface is activated by setting parameter
Table 3 Communication set-up parameters for AF 100 connection.
Alternative Settings Setting for Control through CH0
Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION
NO; FIELDBUS;
ADVANT; STD
MODBUS,
CUSTOMISED
ABB DRIVES;
CSA 2.8/3.0
ADVANT
ABB DRIVES
Initialises communication between drive
(fibre optic channel CH0) and AF 100 interface. The transmission speed is
4 Mbit/s.
Selects the communication profile used by the drive. See section Communication
Profiles below.
After the communication activation parameters have been set, the AF 100 interface must be programmed according to its documentation, and the drive control
) checked and adjusted where necessary.
In an Optical ModuleBus connection, the channel 0 address (parameter
) is calculated from the value of the POSITION terminal in the appropriate database element (for the AC 80, DRISTD) as follows:
1. Multiply the hundreds of the value of POSITION by 16.
2. Add the tens and ones of the value of POSITION to the result.
For example, if the POSITION terminal of the DRISTD database element has the value of 110 (the tenth drive on the Optical ModuleBus ring), parameter 70.01 must be set to 16 × 1 + 10 = 26.
In an AC 80 DriveBus connection, the drives are addressed 1 to 12. The drive address (set with parameter
) is related to the value of the DRNR terminal of
ACSRX PC element.
Fieldbus control
198
Drive control parameters
After the fieldbus communication has been set up, the drive control parameters listed in
Table 4 below should be checked and adjusted where necessary.
The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the fieldbus interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal. The
Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.
The fieldbus signal routes and message composition are explained later under The
fieldbus control interface.
Table 4 Drive control parameters to be checked and adjusted for fieldbus control.
Parameter Setting for fieldbus control
Function/Information
CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION
COMM. MODULE Enables the fieldbus Control Word (except bit 11) when EXT1 is selected as the active control location.
COMM. MODULE Enables the fieldbus Control Word (except bit 11)
FORWARD,
REVERSE or
REQUEST when EXT2 is selected as the active control location.
Enables rotation direction control as defined by parameters 10.01 and 10.02.
COMM. MODULE Enables EXT1/EXT2 selection by fieldbus Control
Word bit 11 EXT CTRL LOC.
COMM. MODULE Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when EXT1 is selected as the active control location. See section
References below for information on the alternative settings.
COMM. MODULE Fieldbus reference REF2 is used when EXT2 is selected as the active control location. See section
References below for information on the alternative settings.
OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION
COMM. MODULE Enables Relay output RO1 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 13.
COMM. MODULE
COMM. MODULE
Enables Relay output RO2 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 14.
Enables Relay output RO3 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 15.
COMM. MODULE Directs the contents of fieldbus reference REF4 to
Analogue output AO1. Scaling: 20000 = 20 mA
COMM. MODULE Directs the contents of fieldbus reference REF5 to
Analogue output AO2. Scaling: 20000 = 20 mA.
Fieldbus control
199
Parameter Setting for fieldbus control
Function/Information
SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS
COMM. MODULE Enables the control of the Run Enable signal through fieldbus Control Word bit 3.
COMM. MODULE Enables fault reset through fieldbus Control Word bit 7.
DONE; SAVE Saves parameter value changes (including those made through fieldbus control) to permanent memory.
COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS
FAULT; NO;
PRESET FREQ;
LAST FREQ
0.10 … 60.00 s
ZERO;
LAST VALUE
0.00 … 60.00 s
Determines drive action in case fieldbus communication is lost.
Note: The communication loss detection is based on monitoring of received Main and Auxiliary data sets
(whose sources are selected with parameters 90.04
and
Defines the time between Main Reference data set loss detection and the action selected with parameter
.
Determines the state in which Relay outputs RO1 to
RO3 and Analogue outputs AO1 and AO2 are left upon loss of the Auxiliary Reference data set.
Defines the time between Auxiliary Reference data set loss detection and the action selected with parameter
.
Note: This supervision function is disabled if this parameter, or parameters
set to 0.
FIELDBUS REFERENCE TARGET SELECTION (Not visible when 98.02 is set to NO.)
0 … 8999 Defines the drive parameter into which the value of fieldbus reference REF3 is written.
Format: xxyy, where xx = parameter group (10 to 89),
yy = parameter Index. E.g. 3001 = parameter 30.01.
0 … 8999 Defines the drive parameter into which the value of fieldbus reference REF4 is written.
Format: see parameter 90.01.
0 … 8999
1 (Fieldbus
Control) or
81 (Standard
Modbus Control)
Defines the drive parameter into which the value of fieldbus reference REF5 is written.
Format: see parameter 90.01.
If
is set to CUSTOMISED, this parameter selects the source from which the drive reads the Main
Reference data set (comprising the fieldbus Control
Word, fieldbus reference REF1, and fieldbus reference REF2).
Fieldbus control
200
Parameter
Setting for fieldbus control
3 (Fieldbus
Control) or
83 (Standard
Modbus Control)
Function/Information
If
is set to CUSTOMISED, this parameter
selects the source from which the drive reads the
Auxiliary Reference data set (comprising fieldbus references REF3, REF4 and REF5).
ACTUAL SIGNAL SELECTION FOR FIELDBUS (Not visible when 98.02 is set to NO.)
302 (Fixed) The Status Word is transmitted to as the first word of the Main Actual Signal data set.
0 … 9999
0 … 9999
Selects the Actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the second word (ACT1) of the Main
Actual Signal data set.
Format: (x)xyy, where (x)x = actual signal group or parameter group, yy = actual signal or parameter index. E.g. 103 = actual signal 01.03 FREQUENCY;
2202 = parameter 22.02 ACCEL TIME 1.
Selects the Actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the third word (ACT2) of the Main
Actual Signal data set.
Format: see parameter 92.02.
0 … 9999
0 … 9999
0 … 9999
Selects the Actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the first word (ACT3) of the Auxiliary
Actual Signal data set.
Format: see parameter 92.02.
Selects the Actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the second word (ACT4) of the
Auxiliary Actual Signal data set.
Format: see parameter 92.02.
Selects the Actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the third word (ACT5) of the Auxiliary
Actual Signal data set.
Format: see parameter 92.02.
Fieldbus control
201
The fieldbus control interface
The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive employs data sets.
One data set (abbreviated DS) consists of three 16-bit words called data words
(DW). The Pump Control Application Program supports the use of four data sets, two in each direction.
The two data sets for controlling the drive are referred to as the Main Reference data set and the Auxiliary Reference data set. The sources from which the drive reads the
Main and Auxiliary Reference data sets are defined by parameters 90.04 and 90.05 respectively. The contents of the Main Reference data set are fixed. The contents of the Auxiliary Reference data set can be selected using parameters 90.01, 90.02 and
90.03.
The two data sets containing actual information on the drive are referred to as the
Main Actual Signal data set and the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set. The contents of both data sets are partly selectable with the parameters at group 92.
Data from fieldbus controller to drive
Word Contents Selector
Data from drive to fieldbus controller
Word Contents Selector
Main Reference data set
1st word
2nd word
3rd word
Control Word
Reference 1
Reference 2
(Fixed)
(Fixed)
(Fixed)
Main Actual Signal data set
1st word
2nd word
3rd word
Status Word
Actual 1
Actual 2
(Fixed)
Par. 92.02
Par. 92.03
Auxiliary Reference data set
1st word Reference 3
2nd word Reference 4
Par. 90.01
Par. 90.02
3rd word Reference 5 Par. 90.03
Aux. Actual Signal data set
1st word Actual 3
2nd word
3rd word
Actual 4
Actual 5
Par. 92.04
Par. 92.05
Par. 92.06
The update time for the Main Reference and Main Actual Signal data sets is 6 milliseconds; for the Auxiliary Reference and Auxiliary Actual Signal data sets, it is
100 milliseconds.
Fieldbus control
202
The Control Word and the Status Word
The Control Word (CW) is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. It is effective when the active control location (EXT1 or EXT2, see parameters 10.01 and 10.02) is set to COMM. MODULE.
The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control Word.
The Status Word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller.
See text under
below for information on the composition of the Control Word and the Status Word.
Reference
REF1
REF2
References
References (REF) are 16-bit signed integers. A negative reference (indicating reversed direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the corresponding positive reference value.
Fieldbus reference selection
Fieldbus reference (sometimes called COM.REF in signal selection contexts) is selected by setting a Reference selection parameter – 11.03 or 11.06 – to COMM.
MODULE.
The fieldbus reference is read every 6 milliseconds by the drive.
Fieldbus reference scaling
Application
Macro Used
Reference
Type
Range Scaling Notes
(any) Frequency -32765 … 32765
-20000 = -[Par. 11.05]
0 = 0
20000 = [Par. 11.05]
Not limited by Pars.
11.04/11.05.
(Final reference limited by
20.01/20.02.)
PFC TRAD
Multipump
Level Control
Controller
Reference
N/A
-32765 … 32765
N/A
-10000 = -[Par. 11.08]
0 = 0
10000 = [Pa. 11.08]
N/A
Hand/Auto Frequency -32765 … 32765
-20000 = -[Par. 11.05]
0 = 0
20000 = [Par. 11.05]
N/A
Not limited by Pars.
11.07/11.08.
(Final reference limited by
20.01/20.02.)
Actual values
Actual Values (ACT) are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive. The functions to be monitored are selected with the parameters in group
92. The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual Values depends on the selected function; please refer to the chapter
.
Fieldbus control
• • • • • • • • • • • •
• • •
• • •
203
Fieldbus control
204
Fieldbus control
205
Communication profiles
The PFC Application Program supports two communication profiles:
• ABB Drives communication profile (default)
• CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile.
The ABB Drives communication profile derives from the PROFIBUS control interface and provides a variety of control and diagnostic functions.
The CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile can be selected for backward compatibility with PFC Application Program versions 2.8 and 3.0. This eliminates the need for reprogramming the PLC when drives with the above-mentioned program versions are replaced.
The Control Word and Status Word for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile are detailed below.
Note: The communication profile selector parameter (
) affects both optical
CH0 and the Standard Modbus channels.
ABB Drives communication profile
The ABB Drives communication profile is active when parameter 98.07 is set to
ABB DRIVES. The Control Word, Status Word, and reference scaling for the profile are described below.
The ABB Drives communication profile can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2.
The Control Word commands are in effect when par. 10.01 or 10.02 (whichever control location is active) is set to COMM. MODULE.
Fieldbus control
206
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 …
15
Table 5 The Control Word (Actual signal 03.01) for the ABB Drives communication profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in
.
Name Value Enter STATE/Description
OFF1 CONTROL 1
0
Enter READY TO OPERATE.
Stop along currently active deceleration ramp (22.03/22.05). Enter OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
OFF2 CONTROL 1
0
OFF3 CONTROL 1
INHIBIT_
OPERATION
RAMP_OUT_
ZERO
0
1
0
1
Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).
Emergency OFF, coast to stop.
Enter OFF2 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).
Emergency stop, stop within time defined by par.
. Enter OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Warning: Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode.
Enter OPERATION ENABLED. (Note: The Run Enable signal must be active; see
. If par.
is set to COMM. MODULE, this bit also activates the
Run Enable signal.)
Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION INHIBITED.
Normal operation.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: OUTPUT ENABLED.
RAMP_HOLD
0
1
Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero.
Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
Enable ramp function.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR ENABLED.
RAMP_IN_
ZERO
0
1
Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
Normal operation. Enter OPERATING.
RESET
0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
0
⇒ 1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Enter SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
0 Continue normal operation.
INCHING_1
INCHING_2
1 Not in use.
1
⇒ 0 Not in use.
1 Not in use.
1
⇒ 0 Not in use.
REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled.
0
EXT CTRL LOC 1
0
Control Word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control Word and Reference.
Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control enabled.
Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp are locked.
Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if par. 11.02
is set to COMM.
MODULE.
Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if par. 11.02
is set to COMM.
MODULE.
Reserved
Fieldbus control
207
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Name
RDY_ON
Table 6 The Status Word (Actual signal 03.02) for the ABB Drives communication profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in
.
RDY_RUN
RDY_REF
TRIPPED
OFF_2_STA
OFF_3_STA
SWC_ON_INHIB
ALARM
AT_SETPOINT
REMOTE
ABOVE_LIMIT
EXT CTRL LOC
RUN ENABLE
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Value STATE/Description
1
0
READY TO SWITCH ON.
NOT READY TO SWITCH ON.
READY TO OPERATE.
OFF1 ACTIVE.
OPERATION ENABLED.
OPERATION INHIBITED.
FAULT.
No fault.
OFF2 inactive.
OFF2 ACTIVE.
OFF3 inactive.
OFF3 ACTIVE.
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Warning/Alarm.
No Warning/Alarm.
OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value (= is within tolerance limits).
Actual value differs from reference value (= is outside tolerance limits).
Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2).
Drive control location: LOCAL.
Actual frequency or speed value equals or is greater than supervision limit
). Valid in both rotation directions regardless of value of par.
.
Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision limit.
External Control Location EXT2 selected.
External Control Location EXT1 selected.
Run Enable signal received.
No Run Enable received.
13, 14 Reserved
15 1
0
Communication error detected by fieldbus adapter module (on fibre optic channel CH0).
Fieldbus adapter (CH0) communication OK.
Fieldbus control
208
MAINS OFF
Power ON
A B C D
(CW Bit3=0)
SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED
(CW Bit0=0)
(SW Bit6=1)
NOT READY
TO SWITCH ON
(SW Bit0=0)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)
ABB Drives
Communication
Profile
CW = Control Word
SW = Status Word n = Speed
I = Input Current
RFG = Ramp Function Generator f = Frequency
OPERATION
INHIBITED operation inhibited
(SW Bit2=0)
READY TO
SWITCH ON
(SW Bit0=1)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111) from any state
Fault
READY TO
OPERATE from any state
OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)
OFF1
ACTIVE n(f)=0 / I=0
(SW Bit1=0)
(CW Bit3=1 and
SW Bit12=1)
B C D
(SW Bit1=1)
FAULT
(SW Bit3=1)
(CW Bit7=1)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111 and SW Bit12=1) from any state
Emergency Stop
OFF3 (CW Bit2=0)
OFF3
ACTIVE
(SW Bit5=0) from any state
Emergency OFF
OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
OFF2
ACTIVE
(SW Bit4=0) n(f)=0 / I=0
(CW Bit4=0)
(CW Bit5=0)
(CW Bit6=0)
C D
D
A
OPERATION
ENABLED
(SW Bit2=1)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)
RFG: OUTPUT
ENABLED
B
C
(CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)
RFG: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED
(CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)
OPERATING
(SW Bit8=1)
D
Figure 2 State Machine for the ABB Drives communication profile.
Fieldbus control
209
CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile
The CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile is active when parameter 98.07 is set to
CSA 2.8/3.0. The Control Word and Status Word for the profile are described below.
Table 7 Control Word for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile.
Bit
0
1
Name
Reserved
ENABLE
Value Description
1
0
Enabled
Coast to stop
2
3
Reserved
START/STOP 0
⇒ 1 Start
0 Stop according to parameter 21.03 STOP FUNCTION
4
5
Reserved
CNTRL_MODE 1
0
Select control mode 2
Select control mode 1
6
7
Reserved
Reserved
8 RESET_FAULT
9 … 15 Reserved
0
⇒ 1 Reset drive fault
Table 8 Status Word for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile.
Bit
0
1
Name
READY
ENABLE
Value Description
1 Ready to start
0
1
0
Initialising, or initialising error
Enabled
Coast to stop
2
3
Reserved
RUNNING 1
0
Running with selected reference
Stopped
4
5
Reserved
REMOTE 1
0
Drive in Remote mode
Drive in Local mode
6
7
Reserved
AT_SETPOINT
8
9
10
FAULTED
WARNING
LIMIT 1
0
1
0
1
0
1 Drive at reference
0 Drive not at reference
A fault is active
No active faults
A warning is active
No active warnings
Drive at a limit
Drive at no limit
11 … 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
210
Diverse status, fault, alarm and limit words
Table 9 The Auxiliary Status Word (Actual signal 03.03).
Bit
0
1
Name
Reserved
OUT OF WINDOW
Description
Speed difference is out of the window (in speed control)*.
2
3
4
Reserved
MAGNETIZED
Reserved
Flux has been formed in the motor.
5
6
7
8
9
SYNC RDY
1 START NOT
DONE
IDENTIF RUN
DONE
START INHIBITION
Position counter synchronised.
Drive has not been started after changing the motor parameters in group 99.
Motor ID Run successfully completed.
LIMITING
Prevention of unexpected start-up active.
Control at a limit. See actual signal 03.04 LIMIT
WORD 1 below.
Torque reference is followed*.
10
11
TORQ CONTROL
ZERO SPEED Absolute value of motor actual speed is below zero speed limit (4% of synchronous speed).
Internal speed feedback followed.
12 INTERNAL SPEED
FB
M/F COMM ERR 13 Master/Follower link (on CH2) communication error*.
14 … 15 Reserved
*See Master/Follower Application Guide (3AFY 58962180 [English]).
Fieldbus control
Table 10 Limit Word 1 (Actual signal 03.04).
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
0
1
2
12
13
14
15
9
10
11
Name
TORQ MOTOR LIM
SPD_TOR_MIN_LIM
SPD_TOR_MAX_LIM
TORQ_USER_CUR_LIM
TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM
TORQ_MIN_LIM
TORQ_MAX_LIM
TREF_TORQ_MIN_LIM
TREF_TORQ_MAX_LIM
FLUX_MIN_LIM
FREQ_MIN_LIMIT
FREQ_MAX_LIMIT
DC_UNDERVOLT
DC_OVERVOLT
TORQUE LIMIT
FREQ_LIMIT
Active Limit
Pull-out limit.
Speed control torque min. limit.
Speed control torque max. limit.
User-defined current limit.
Internal current limit.
Any torque min. limit.
Any torque max. limit.
Torque reference min. limit.
Torque reference max. limit.
Flux reference min. limit.
Speed/Frequency min. limit.
Speed/Frequency max. limit.
DC undervoltage limit.
DC overvoltage limit.
Any torque limit.
Any speed/frequency limit.
Table 11 Fault Word 1 (Actual signal 03.05).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bit
0
Name
SHORT CIRC
OVERCURRENT
DC OVERVOLT
ACS 800 TEMP
EARTH FAULT
THERMISTOR
MOTOR TEMP
SYSTEM_FAULT
Description
For the possible causes and remedies, see the chapter
8
9
UNDERLOAD
OVERFREQ
10 … 15 Reserved
A fault is indicated by the System Fault Word
(Actual signal 03.07).
For the possible causes and remedies, see the chapter
211
Fieldbus control
212
10
11
12
13
14
15
5
6
7
8
9
Table 12 Fault Word 2 (Actual signal 03.06).
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
Name
SUPPLY PHASE
NO MOT DATA
DC UNDERVOLT
Reserved
RUN DISABLE
Description
For the possible causes and remedies, see the chapter
For the possible causes and remedies, see the chapter
Reserved
I/O COMM ERR
CTRL B TEMP
EXTERNAL FLT
OVER SWFREQ
AI < MIN FUNC
PPCC LINK
COMM MODULE
PANEL LOSS
MOTOR STALL
MOTOR PHASE
For the possible causes and remedies, see the chapter
Switching overfrequency fault.
For the possible causes and remedies, see the chapter
Fieldbus control
Table 13 The System Fault Word (Actual signal 03.07).
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
0
1
2
12
13
14
15
9
10
11
Name
FLT (F1_7)
USER MACRO
FLT (F1_4)
FLT (F1_5)
FLT (F2_12)
FLT (F2_13)
FLT (F2_14)
FLT (F2_15)
FLT (F2_16)
FLT (F2_17)
FLT (F2_18)
FLT (F2_19)
FLT (F2_3)
FLT (F2_1)
FLT (F2_0)
Reserved
Description
Factory default parameter file error.
User Macro file error.
FPROM operating error.
FPROM data error.
Internal time level 2 overflow.
Internal time level 3 overflow.
Internal time level 4 overflow.
Internal time level 5 overflow.
State machine overflow.
Application program execution error.
Application program execution error.
Illegal instruction.
Register stack overflow.
System stack overflow.
System stack underflow.
213
Fieldbus control
214
Table 14 Alarm Word 1 (Actual signal 03.08).
Bit
0
Name
START INHIBIT
1
2
3
START INTERLOCK
THERMISTOR
MOTOR TEMP
4 ACS 800 TEMP
5 … 11 Reserved
12 COMM MODULE
Description
For the possible causes and remedies, see the
.
Start interlock signal is on (starting possible).
For the possible causes and remedies, see the
.
For the possible causes and remedies, see the
.
13
14
Reserved
EARTH FAULT For the possible causes and remedies, see the
.
15 Reserved
Table 15 Alarm Word 2 (Actual signal 03.09).
Description Bit
0
1
Name
Reserved
UNDERLOAD (ff6A) For the possible causes and remedies, see the
.
2 … 6
7
8
9
10
11, 12
13
Reserved
POWFAIL FILE
ALM (OS_17)
MOTOR STALL (7121)
AI < MIN FUNC (8110)
Reserved
PANEL LOSS (5300)
Error in restoring POWERFAIL.DDF.
Error in restoring POWERDOWN.DDF.
For the possible causes and remedies, see the
.
For the possible causes and remedies, see the
.
14, 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
215
Table 16 Alarm Word 3 (Actual signal 03.10).
Bit Name
0
1
REPLACE FAN
SYNCRO SPEED
2 … 15 Reserved
Description
For the possible causes and remedies, see the chapter
Table 17 Limit Word INV (Actual signal 03.30)
The LIMIT WORD INV word includes faults and warnings which occur when the output current limit of the drive is exceeded. The current limit protects the drive in various cases, e.g. integrator overload and high IGBT temperature.
Bit
0
1
2
Name
INTEGRAT 200
INTEGRAT 150
INT LOW FREQ
Description
Current limit at 200% integrator overload. Temperature model is not active.*
Current limit at 150% integrator overload. Temperature model is not active.*
Current limit at high IGBT temperature with low output frequency
(<10 Hz). Temperature model is not active.*
3
4
5
INTG PP TEMP
PP OVER TEMP
PP OVERLOAD
Current limit at high IGBT temperature. Temperature model is not active.*
Current limit at high IGBT temperature. Temperature model is active.*
Current limit at high IGBT junction to case temperature.
Temperature model is active.*
If the IGBT junction to case temperature continues to rise in spite of the current limitation, PP OVERLOAD warning or fault occurs.
.
6
7
8
9
INV POW LIM
INV TRIP CUR
OVERLOAD CUR
CONT DC CUR
Current limit at inverter output power limit.
Current limit at inverter overcurrent trip limit.
Maximum inverter overload current limit. See parameter
.
Continuous DC current limit.
Continuous output current limit (I contmax
).
10 CONT OUT CUR
11 … 15 Reserved
*Only active with ACS 600 hardware.
Fieldbus control
216
Table 18 PFC Status Word (Actual signal 05.01)
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Name
PFC REF
PFC REF STEP
PFC REF BOOST
PFC REF INLET
PFC REF OUTLET
CONT DEV
PROFILE HIGH
AUX MOTORS OK
AUTOCHANGE
SLEEP MODE
PI FREEZE
ANTI-JAM STATUS 1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Value Description
1
0
An external process reference is in use.
An internal process reference is in use.
1
0
1
0
1
A reference step is active.
No reference steps are active.
Sleep boost active.
Sleep boost inactive.
0
1
Low inlet pressure protection active (see parameter group 44).
(Normal operation)
High outlet pressure protection active (see parameter group 44).
0
1
0
(Normal operation)
Negative deviation between reference and actual signal.
Positive deviation between reference and actual signal.
See parameter group 44.
Interlocks/auxiliary motors mismatch.
Interlocks and the number of auxiliary motors match.
Autochange mode active.
Autochange mode inactive.
Sleep mode active.
Sleep mode inactive.
PI input or output frozen.
PI input and output free.
Anti-jam sequence in progress.
Anti-jam sequence not in progress.
12 … 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
217
Table 19 PFC Alarm Word (Actual signal 05.02)
Bit
0
1
Name
INLET LOW
OUTLET HIGH
4
5
2
3
INLET VERY LOW
OUTLET VERY HIGH
MS INV LOSS
F TO MS CM LOSS
6 … 15 Reserved
Description
For the possible causes and remedies, see the chapter
Table 20 PFC Fault Word (Actual signal 05.03)
Bit
0
1
Name
INLET LOW
OUTLET HIGH
4
5
2
3
INLET VERY LOW
OUTLET VERY HIGH
MS INV LOSS
START SEL WRONG
6 … 15 Reserved
Description
For the possible causes and remedies, see the chapter
Table 21 LC (Level control) Status Word (Actual signal 05.21)
10
11
12
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Bit
0
1
Name
LOW LEVEL 1
LOW LEVEL 2
STOP LEVEL
START1 LEVEL
START2 LEVEL
START3 LEVEL
START4 LEVEL
START5 LEVEL
START6 LEVEL
START7 LEVEL
START8 LEVEL
HIGH LEVEL 1
HIGH LEVEL 2
Description
In Level control, each bit indicates if a certain pre-defined level has been reached.
13 REF SPEED
Indicates whether the drive is running at efficiency speed (par.
) or high speed
(par.
).
0 = Efficiency speed
1 = High speed
14 … 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
218
Fieldbus control
219
Analogue extension module
Chapter overview
The chapter describes the use of analogue extension module RAIO as an speed reference interface of ACS800 equipped with the Pump Control Application
Program.
Speed control through the analogue extension module
Only the use of a bipolar input (± signal range) is covered here. The use of unipolar input corresponds to that of a standard unipolar input when:
• the settings described below are done, and
• the communication between the module and the drive is activated by parameter
Basic checks
Ensure the drive is:
• installed and commissioned, and
• the external start and stop signals are connected.
Ensure the extension module:
• settings are adjusted. (See below.)
• is installed and reference signal is connected to AI1.
• is connected to the drive.
Settings of the analogue extension module and the drive
• Set the module node address to 5 (not required if installed to the option slot of the drive).
• Select the signal type for the module input AI1 (switch).
• Select the operation mode (unipolar/bipolar) of the module input (switch).
• Ensure the drive parameter settings correspond to the mode of the module inputs
and
).
• Set the drive parameters (see the appropriate subsection on the following pages).
Analogue extension module
220
Parameter settings: bipolar input in basic speed control
The table below lists the parameters that affect the handling of the speed reference received through the extension module bipolar input AI1 (AI5 of the drive).
Parameter
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE
98.08 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC
10.03 DIRECTION
11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT
11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT
11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM
11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM
13.16 MINIMUM AI5
13.17 MAXIMUM AI5
13.18 SCALE AI5
13.20 INVERT AI5
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION
Setting
RAIO-SLOT1
BIPO AI5
FORWARD; REVERSE; REQUEST
(1
EXT1
AI5 minREF1 maxREF1 minAI5 maxAI5
100%
NO
(2
The figure below presents the speed reference corresponding to bipolar input AI1 of the extension module .
Operation Range scaled maxREF1
FORWARD or
REQUEST
1) minREF1
-minREF1
REVERSE or
REQUEST
1)
-scaled maxREF1
-maxAI5 -minAI5 minAI5
Analogue Input Signal
maxAI5 minAI5 = 13.16 MINIMUM AI5 maxAI5 = 13.17 MAXIMUM AI5 scaled maxREF1 = 13.18 SCALE AI5 x 11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM minREF1 = 11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM
1)
For the negative speed range, the drive must receive a separate reverse command.
2)
Set if supervision of living zero is used.
Analogue extension module
221
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
Chapter overview
This chapter lists the actual signal and parameter lists with some additional data. For the descriptions, see chapter Actual signals and parameters.
Terms and abbreviations
Term
PB
FbEq
Absolute maximum frequency
W
Definition
Parameter address for the fieldbus communication through an
NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter.
Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication.
if the absolute value of the minimum limit
is greater than the maximum limit.
Write access is not allowed when the motor is running.
Fieldbus addresses
Rxxx adapter modules (such as RPBA-01, RDNA-01, etc.)
See the appropriate fieldbus adapter module User’s Manual.
Nxxx adapter modules (such as NPBA-12, NDNA-02, etc.)
NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter:
• See column PB in the tables below.
NIBA-01 InterBus-S Adapter:
• xxyy × 100 + 12288 converted into hexadecimal, where xxyy = drive parameter number
• Example: The index for drive parameter 13.09 is 1309 + 12288 = 13597 (decimal)
= 351Dh.
NMBA-01 Modbus Adapter and NMBP-01 Modbus Plus Adapter:
• 4xxyy, where xxyy = drive parameter number
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
222
Actual signals
Index Name Short name
01 ACTUAL SIGNALS
01.02 MOTOR SPEED FILT MOTOR SP
01.03 FREQUENCY FREQUENC
01.04 MOTOR CURRENT MOTOR CU
01.05 MOTOR TORQ FILT2 MOTOR TO
01.06 POWER POWER
01.07 DC VOLTAGE
01.08 MAINS VOLTAGE
01.09 MOTOR VOLTAGE
01.10 PP TEMPERATURE
01.11 EXTERNAL REF 1
01.12 EXTERNAL REF 2
DC VOLTA
MAINS VO
MOTOR VO
PP TEMPE
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL
01.13 CTRL LOCATION CTRL LOC
01.14 TIME OF USAGE TIME OF
01.15 KILOWATT HOURS KILOWATT
01.16 APPL BLOCK OUTPUT APPL BLO
01.17 DI6-1 STATUS
01.18 AI1 [V]
01.19 AI2 [mA]
01.20 AI3 [mA]
01.21 RO3-1 STATUS
01.22 AO1 [mA]
01.23 AO2 [mA]
01.24 ACTUAL VALUE 1
DI6-1 ST
AI1 [V]
AI2 [mA]
AI3 [mA]
RO3-1 ST
AO1 [mA]
AO2 [mA]
ACTUAL V
01.25 ACTUAL VALUE 2 ACTUAL V
01.26 CONTROL DEVIATION CONTROL
01.27 ACTUAL FUNC OUT ACTUAL F
01.28 EXT AO1 [mA] EXT AO1
01.29 EXT AO2 [mA]
01.30 PP 1 TEMP
01.31 PP 2 TEMP
EXT AO2
PP 1 TEM
PP 2 TEM
01.32 PP 3 TEMP
01.33 PP 4 TEMP
01.37 MOTOR TEMP EST
PP 3 TEM
PP 4 TEM
MOTOR TE
01.38 AI5 [mA]
01.39 AI6 [mA]
01.40 DI7-12 STATUS
AI5 [mA]
AI6 [mA]
DI7..12 S
01.41 EXT RO STATUS EXT RO S
01.42 PFC OPERATION TIM PFC OPER
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
1 = 0.001 V
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 0.001 mA
0 = 0%
10000 = 100%
0 = 0%
10000 = 100%
-10000 = -100%
10000 = 100%
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 1 °C
1 = 1 °C
1 = 1 °C
1 = 1 °C
1 = 1 °C
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 1
1 = 1
1 = 1
FbEq Unit
-2000 = -100%
2000 = 100% of speed corresponding to absolute maximum frequency
-100 = -1 Hz
100 = 1 Hz
10 = 1 A
-10000 = -100%
10000 = 100% of motor nominal torque
0 = 0%
1000 = 100% of motor nominal power
1 = 1 V
1 = 1 V
1 = 1 V
1 = 1 °C
1 = 1 rpm
0 = 0%
10000 = 100%
(Note 1)
(1,2) LOCAL; (3)
EXT1; (4) EXT2
1 = 1 h
1 = 100 kWh
0 = 0%
10000 = 100% rpm
Hz
A
%
%
V
V
V
C rpm
% h kWh
%
V mA mA mA mA
%
%
% mA mA
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C mA mA h
Range PB
2
LOCAL; EXT1;
EXT2
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
37
38
39
40
41
42
7
8
9
10
11
12
3
4
5
6
223
Index Name
01.43 MOTOR RUN-TIME
Short name
MOTOR RU
01.44 FAN ON-TIME FAN ON-T
01.45 CTRL BOARD TEMP CTRL BOA
01.47 M/F STATE M/F STAT
01.48 START COUNTER
02 ACTUAL SIGNALS
02.01 SPEED REF 2
02.02 SPEED REF 3
START CO
SPEED RE
SPEED RE
02.09 TORQUE REF 2
02.10 TORQUE REF 3
TORQUE R
TORQUE R
02.13 TORQ USED REF TORQ USE
02.17 SPEED ESTIMATED SPEED ES
02.19 MOTOR MOTOR AC
ACCELERATIO
03 INTERNAL DATA
03.01 MAIN CONTROL MAIN CON
WORD
03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD MAIN STA
03.03 AUX STATUS WORD AUX STAT
03.04 LIMIT WORD 1 LIMIT WO
03.05 FAULT WORD 1 FAULT WO
03.06 FAULT WORD 2 FAULT WO
03.07 SYSTEM FAULT WORD SYSTEM F
03.08 ALARM WORD 1 ALARM WO
03.09 ALARM WORD 2
03.10 ALARM WORD 3
03.19 INT INIT FAULT
ALARM WO
ALARM WO
INT INIT
03.20 FAULT CODE 1 LAST FAULT CO
03.21 FAULT CODE 2 LAST FAULT CO
03.22 FAULT CODE 3 LAST FAULT CO
03.23 FAULT CODE 4 LAST FAULT CO
03.24 FAULT CODE 5 LAST FAULT CO
03.25 WARN CODE 1 LAST WARN COD
03.26 WARN CODE 2 LAST WARN COD
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
FbEq
1 = 10 h
1 = 10 h
1 = 1 °C
(0,1) FOLLOWER;
(2) MASTER
1 = 1
Unit
h h
°C
0 = 0%
20000 = 100% of motor absolute max. frequency
0 = 0%
10000 = 100% of motor nominal torque
0 = 0%
20000 = 100% of motor absolute max. frequency
1 = 1 rpm/s rpm rpm
%
%
% rpm rpm/s
Range
FOLLOWER;
MASTER
PB
43
44
45
47
48
51
52
59
60
63
67
69
84
85
93
81
82
83
94
95
76
77
78
79
80
96
97
98
-
99
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
224
Index Name
03.28 WARN CODE 4 LAST
03.29 WARN CODE 5 LAST
03.30 LIMIT WORD INV
Short name
03.27 WARN CODE 3 LAST WARN COD
WARN COD
WARN COD
LIMIT WO
FbEq Unit Range
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
-
-
-
-
PB
05 PFC WORDS
05.01 PFC STATUS
05.02 PFC ALARM WORD
05.03 PFC FAULT WORD
PFC STAT
PFC ALAR
PFC FAUL
PFC ACT
APPLIC R
AUX ON
WAKE UP
BOOST AC
ACT FLOW
SUM FLOW
PRESSURE
SHARE AI
SHARE AI
SHARE AI
LC STATU
ACT LEVE
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
%
% m m
3
3
/h bar
V mA mA
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
-500 ... 500
-500 … 500
-
-
-
05.04 PFC ACT REF
05.05 APPLIC REF AS Hz
05.06 AUX ON
05.07 WAKE UP ACT
05.08 BOOST ACT
05.11 ACT FLOW
05.12 SUM FLOW
05.13 PRESSURE DEV
05.15 SHARE AI1
05.16 SHARE AI2
05.17 SHARE AI3
05.21 LC STATUS
05.23 ACT LEVEL
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS
09.01 AI1 SCALED
09.02 AI2 SCALED
09.03 AI3 SCALED
09.04 AI5 SCALED
09.05 AI6 SCALED
09.06 DS MCW
09.07 MASTER REF1
09.08 MASTER REF2
09.09 AUX DS VAL1
09.10 AUX DS VAL2
09.11 AUX DS VAL3
09.12 LCU ACT SIGNAL 1
09.13 LCU ACT SIGNAL 2
AI1 SCAL
AI2 SCAL
AI3 SCAL
AI5 SCAL
AI6 SCAL
DS MCW
MASTER R
MASTER R
AUX DS V
AUX DS V
AUX DS V
LCU ACT1
LCU ACT2 -
-
1 = 1
1 = 0.001 V
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 0.001 mA
(Note 2)
20000 = 10 V
20000 = 20 mA
20000 = 20 mA
20000 = 20 mA
20000 = 20 mA
0 ... 65535 (Decimal)
-32768 … 32767
-32768 … 32767
-32768 … 32767
-32768 … 32767
-32768 … 32767
-
-
%
Hz
%
-
-500 ... 500
-500 ... 500
0 … 20000
0 … 20000
0 … 20000
0 … 20000
0 … 20000
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
-
-32768 … 32767 -
-32768 … 32767 -
-32768 … 32767 -
-32768 … 32767 -
-
-32768 … 32767 -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
(Note 1) Percent of maximum process reference (PFC TRAD macro) or maximum frequency (Hand/
Auto macro).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
(Note 2) The contents of these data words are detailed in the chapter
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
225
Parameters
Index Name/Selection Default setting
MULTIMAS-
TER
PFC TRAD HAND/AUTO LEVEL CTRL USER 1 USER 2
10 START/STOP/DIR
10.01 EXT 1 STRT/STP/DI DI1
10.02 EXT 2 STRT/STP/DI DI6
10.03 DIRECTION FORWARD
10.04 EXT 1 STRT PTR
10.05 EXT 2 STRT PTR
11 REFERENCE
0
0
DI1
DI6
FORWARD FORWARD
0
0
DI1
DI6
0
0
DI1
DI6
FORWARD
0
0
SELECT
11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT EXT2
11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI1
11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM 0 Hz
11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM 52 Hz
11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT AI1
11.07 EXT REF2 MINIMUM 0%
11.08 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM 100%
11.09 EXT 1/2 SEL PTR
11.10 EXT 1 REF PTR
11.11 EXT 2 REF PTR
12 CONSTANT FREQ
0
0
0
12.01 CONST FREQ SEL NOT SEL
12.02 CONST FREQ 1 25 Hz
12.03 CONST FREQ 2 30 Hz
12.04 CONST FREQ 3
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS
13.01 MINIMUM AI1
35 Hz
0 V
EXT2
AI1
0 Hz
52 Hz
AI1
0
0
0%
100%
0
NOT SEL
25 Hz
30 Hz
35 Hz
DI5
AI1
0 Hz
52 Hz
AI2
0%
100%
0
0
0
NOT SEL
25 Hz
30 Hz
35 Hz
EXT2
AI1
0 Hz
52 Hz
AI1
0%
100%
0
0
0
NOT SEL
25 Hz
30 Hz
35 Hz
13.02 MAXIMUM AI1
13.03 SCALE AI1
13.04 FILTER AI1
13.05 INVERT AI1
13.06 MINIMUM AI2
13.07 MAXIMUM AI2
13.08 SCALE AI2
13.09 FILTER AI2
13.10 INVERT AI2
13.11 MINIMUM AI3
13.12 MAXIMUM AI3
13.13 SCALE AI3
13.14 FILTER AI3
13.15 INVERT AI3
13.16 MINIMUM AI5
13.17 MAXIMUM AI5
13.18 SCALE AI5
13.19 FILTER AI5
13.20 INVERT AI5
13.21 MINIMUM AI6
13.22 MAXIMUM AI6
13.23 SCALE AI6
13.24 FILTER AI6
13.25 INVERT AI6
10 V
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
14 RELAY OUTPUTS
14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT READY
14.02 RELAY RO2 OUTPUT RUNNING
14.03 RELAY RO3 OUTPUT FAULT(-1)
14.04 RDIO MOD1 RO1 READY
0 V
10 V
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
M1 START
M2 START
FAULT
READY
0 V
10 V
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
READY
RUNNING
FAULT(-1)
READY
0 V
10 V
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
4 mA
20 mA
100.0%
0.10 s
NO
READY
RUNNING
FAULT(-1)
READY
PB W
192
193
194
195
196
197
186
187
188
189
190
191
198
199
200
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
101 W
102 W
103 W
104 W
105 W
132
133
134
135
136
127 W
128 W
129
130
131 W
151
152
153
154
201 W
202 W
203 W
204 W
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
226
Index Name/Selection
14.05 RDIO MOD1 RO2
14.06 RDIO MOD2 RO1
14.07 RDIO MOD2 RO2
14.08 RO PTR1
14.09 RO PTR2
14.10 RO PTR3
14.11 RO PTR4
14.12 RO PTR5
14.13 RO PTR6
14.14 RO PTR7
15 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
15.01 ANALOGUE
OUTPUT1
TER
FAULT(-1)
0
0
Default setting
MULTIMASPFC TRAD HAND/AUTO LEVEL CTRL USER 1 USER 2
RUNNING
FAULT
0
0
0
0
0
RUNNING
FAULT
0
0
0
0
0
FAULT(-1)
0
0
RUNNING
FAULT
FAULT(-1)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RUNNING
FAULT
FAULT(-1)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
15.02 INVERT AO1
15.03 MINIMUM AO1
15.04 FILTER AO1
15.05 SCALE AO1
15.06 ANALOGUE
OUTPUT2
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
ACTUAL 1
15.07 INVERT AO2
15.08 MINIMUM AO2
15.09 FILTER AO2
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
15.10 SCALE AO2
15.11 AO1 PTR
15.12 AO2 PTR
100%
0
0
16 SYSTEM CTR INPUT
16.01 RUN ENABLE YES
16.02 PARAMETER LOCK OPEN
16.03 PASS CODE 0
16.04 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SEL
16.05 USER MACRO IO NOT SEL
CHG
16.06 LOCAL LOCK
16.07 PARAMETER
FALSE
DONE
BACKUP
16.08 RUN ENA PTR
16.09 CTRL BOARD
SUPPLY 24V
16.10 FAULT RESET PTR 0
20 LIMITS
0
INTERNAL
20.01 MINIMUM FREQ
20.02 MAXIMUM FREQ
20.03 MAXIMUM
0.00 Hz
(calculated)
(drive type-
CURRENT A specific)
20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE 300.0%
20.05 OVERVOLTAGE CTL ON
20.06 UNDERVOLTAGE
CTL
20.07 PI MIN FREQ
ON
0.00 Hz
20.11 P MOTORING LIM 300.0%
20.12 P GENERATING LIM -300.0%
21 START/STOP
21.01 START FUNCTION AUTO
21.02 CONST MAGN TIME 500.0 ms
21.03 STOP FUNCTION RAMP
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
ACTUAL 1
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
YES
OPEN
0
NOT SEL
NOT SEL
FALSE
DONE
0
INTERNAL
24V
0
(drive typespecific)
300.0%
ON
ON
0.00 Hz
300.0%
-300.0%
AUTO
500.0 ms
COAST
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
CURRENT
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
YES
OPEN
0
NOT SEL
NOT SEL
FALSE
DONE
0
INTERNAL
24V
0
0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz
(calculated) (calculated)
(drive typespecific)
300.0%
ON
ON
0.00 Hz
300.0%
-300.0%
AUTO
500.0 ms
COAST
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
ACTUAL 1
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
YES
OPEN
0
NOT SEL
NOT SEL
FALSE
DONE
0
INTERNAL
24V
0
0.00 Hz
(calculated)
(drive typespecific)
300.0%
ON
ON
0.00 Hz
300.0%
-300.0%
AUTO
500.0 ms
RAMP
PB W
205 W
206 W
207 W
208 W
209 W
210 W
211 W
212 W
213 W
214 W
226 W
232
233
234
235
236
237
227
228
229
230
231 W
251 W
252
253
254 W
255 W
256
257
258
259
260
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
361
362
376 W
377 W
378
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
227
Index Name/Selection Default setting
MULTIMASPFC TRAD HAND/AUTO LEVEL CTRL USER 1 USER 2
TER
21.07 RUN ENABLE FUNC RAMP STOP COAST STOP COAST STOP RAMP STOP
21.08 SCALAR FLYSTART OFF OFF OFF OFF
21.09 START INTRL FUNC OFF2 STOP OFF2 STOP OFF2 STOP OFF2 STOP
22 ACCEL/DECEL
22.01 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL ACC/DEC 1 ACC/DEC 1 ACC/DEC 1 ACC/DEC 1
22.02 ACCEL TIME 1
22.03 DECEL TIME 1
22.04 ACCEL TIME 2
3.00 s
3.00 s
1.00 s
3.00 s
3.00 s
1.00 s
3.00 s
3.00 s
1.00 s
3.00 s
3.00 s
1.00 s
22.05 DECEL TIME 2
22.06 SHAPE TIME
22.08 ACC PTR
22.09 DEC PTR
23 SPEED CTRL
1.00 s
0.00 s
22.07 STOP RAMP TIME 3.00 s
0
0
23.01 KPS
23.02 TIS
23.03 SLIP GAIN
10.0
2.50 s
0.0%
25 CRITICAL FREQ
25.01 CRIT FREQ SELECT OFF
25.02 CRIT FREQ 1 LOW 0 Hz
0
0
1.00 s
0.00 s
3.00 s
10.0
2.50 s
0.0%
OFF
0 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
0
0
1.00 s
0.00 s
3.00 s
10.0
2.50 s
0.0%
OFF
0 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
0
0
1.00 s
0.00 s
3.00 s
10.0
2.50 s
0.0%
OFF
0 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
25.03 CRIT FREQ 1 HIGH 0 Hz
25.04 CRIT FREQ 2 LOW 0 Hz
25.05 CRIT FREQ 2 HIGH 0 Hz
26 MOTOR CONTROL
26.01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION NO
26.02 FLUX BRAKING YES
26.03 IR COMPENSATION 0.0%
26.04 HEX FIELD WEAKEN OFF
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION FAULT
30.02 PANEL LOSS FAULT
30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT NOT SEL
NO
YES
0.0%
OFF
FAULT
FAULT
NOT SEL
NO
DTC
NO
YES
0.0%
OFF
FAULT
FAULT
NOT SEL
NO
DTC
NO
YES
0.0%
OFF
FAULT
FAULT
NOT SEL
NO
DTC
30.04 MOT THERM PROT NO
30.05 MOTOR THERM DTC
PMODE
30.06 MOTOR THERM
TIME
30.07 MOTOR LOAD
(calculated)
100.0%
CURVE
30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD 74.0%
30.09 BREAK POINT 45.0 Hz
30.10 STALL FUNCTION FAULT
30.11 STALL FREQ HI 20.0 Hz
30.12 STALL TIME 20.00 s
30.13 UNDERLOAD
FUNCTIO
30.14 UNDERLOAD TIME 600 s
30.15 UNDERLOAD
CURVE
30.16 MOTOR PHASE
NO
1
NO
LOSS
30.17 EARTH FAULT
30.18 PRESET FREQ
FAULT
10.00 Hz
30.19 COMM FAULT FUNC FAULT
30.20 MAIN REF DS T-OUT 1.00 s
30.21 COMM FAULT RO/AO ZERO
(calculated)
100.0%
74.0%
45.0 Hz
FAULT
20.0 Hz
20.00 s
NO
600 s
1
NO
FAULT
10.00 Hz
FAULT
1.00 s
ZERO
(calculated)
100.0%
74.0%
45.0 Hz
FAULT
20.0 Hz
20.00 s
NO
600 s
1
NO
FAULT
10.00 Hz
FAULT
1.00 s
ZERO
(calculated)
100.0%
74.0%
45.0 Hz
FAULT
20.0 Hz
20.00 s
NO
600 s
1
NO
FAULT
10.00 Hz
FAULT
1.00 s
ZERO
PB W
382
383 W
384
426
427
428
476
477
478
479
480
501 W
502 W
503 W
504 W
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
608
609
610
611
612
613
401 W
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
228
Index Name/Selection Default setting
MULTIMASPFC TRAD HAND/AUTO LEVEL CTRL USER 1 USER 2
TER
30.22 AUX REF DS T-OUT 3.00 s
30.23 LIMIT WARNING 0000000
3.00 s
0000000
3.00 s
0000000
3.00 s
0000000
31 AUTOMATIC RESET
31.01 NUMBER OF TRIALS 0
31.02 TRIAL TIME 30.0 s
31.03 DELAY TIME
31.04 OVERCURRENT
31.05 OVERVOLTAGE
31.06 UNDERVOLTAGE
31.07 AI SIGNAL<MIN
32 SUPERVISION
0.0 s
NO
NO
NO
NO
32.01 FREQ1 FUNCTION NO
32.02 FREQ1 LIMIT 0 Hz
32.03 FREQ2 FUNCTION NO
32.04 FREQ2 LIMIT
32.05 CURRENT
FUNCTION
0 Hz
NO
0
30.0 s
0.0 s
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
0 Hz
NO
0 Hz
NO
0
30.0 s
0.0 s
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
0 Hz
NO
0 Hz
NO
0
30.0 s
0.0 s
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
0 Hz
NO
0 Hz
NO
32.06 CURRENT LIMIT
32.07 REF1 FUNCTION
32.08 REF1 LIMIT
32.09 REF2 FUNCTION
32.10 REF2 LIMIT
32.11 ACT1 FUNCTION
32.12 ACT1 LIMIT
32.13 ACT2 FUNCTION
32.14 ACT2 LIMIT
0 A
NO
0 Hz
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0%
32.15 RESET START CNT NO
33 INFORMATION
33.01 SW PACKAGE VER (Version)
33.02 APPLIC NAME
33.03 TEST DATE
40 PI-CONTROLLER
(Version)
(Date)
0 A
NO
0 Hz
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
(Version)
(Version)
(Date)
0 A
NO
0 Hz
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
(Version)
(Version)
(Date)
0 A
NO
0 Hz
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
(Version)
(Version)
(Date)
40.01 PI GAIN
40.02 PI INTEG TIME
40.07 ACT1 MINIMUM
40.08 ACT1 MAXIMUM
40.09 ACT2 MINIMUM
2.5
3.00 s
40.03 ERROR VALUE INV NO
40.04 ACTUAL VALUE SEL ACT1
40.05 ACTUAL1 INPUT SEL AI2
40.06 ACTUAL2 INPUT SEL AI3
0%
100%
0%
40.10 ACT2 MAXIMUM 100%
40.11 ACT1 UNIT SCALE 0.10
40.12 ACTUAL 1 UNIT bar
2.5
3.00 s
NO
ACT1
AI2
AI3
0%
100%
0%
100%
0.10
bar
0.10
bar
0.10
40.13 ACT2 UNIT SCALE 0.10
40.14 ACTUAL 2 UNIT
40.15 ACTUAL FUNC bar
0.10
SCALE
40.16 ACTUAL1 PTR
41 PFC-CONTROL 1
0 0 N/A
41.01 SET POINT 1/2 SEL SET POINT 1 SET POINT 1 N/A
41.02 SET POINT 1 SRCE INTERNAL
41.03 SPOINT 1 INTERNAL 40.0%
INTERNAL
40.0%
N/A
N/A
41.04 SPOINT 2 INTERNAL 40.0%
41.05 REFERENCE STEP 1 0.0%
41.06 REFERENCE STEP 2 0.0%
40.0%
0.0%
0.0%
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
PB W
622
623
651
652
653
654
655
676
677
678
866
876
877
878
879
880
881
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
857
858
859
860
861
862
851
852
853
854
855
856
863
864
865
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
229
Index Name/Selection Default setting
MULTIMASPFC TRAD HAND/AUTO LEVEL CTRL USER 1 USER 2
TER
41.07 REFERENCE STEP 3 0.0%
41.08 REFERENCE STEP 4 0.0%
41.09 REFERENCE STEP 5 0.0%
41.10 REFERENCE STEP 6 0.0%
41.11 REFERENCE STEP 7 0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
41.12 START FREQ 1
41.13 START FREQ 2
41.14 START FREQ 3
41.15 START FREQ 4
41.16 START FREQ 5
41.17 START FREQ 6
41.18 START FREQ 7
41.19 LOW FREQ 1
41.20 LOW FREQ 2
50.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
25.0 Hz
25.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
25.0 Hz
25.0 Hz
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
41.21 LOW FREQ 3
41.22 LOW FREQ 4
41.23 LOW FREQ 5
41.24 LOW FREQ 6
41.25 LOW FREQ 7
41.26 FOLLOWER START
DL
41.27 FOLLOWER STOP
DLY
42 PFC CONTROL 2
42.01 NBR OF AUX
MOTORS
25.0 Hz
25.0 Hz
25.0 Hz
25.0 Hz
25.0 Hz
5.0 s
3.0 s
N/A
25.0 Hz
25.0 Hz
25.0 Hz
25.0 Hz
25.0 Hz
5.0 s
3.0 s
ONE
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
42.02 AUX MOT START
DLY
N/A
42.03 AUX MOT STOP DLY N/A
42.04 INTERLOCKS
42.06 AUTOCHANGE
INTERV
N/A
N/A
42.07 AUTOCHANGE
LEVEL
42.11 REGUL BYPASS
N/A
42.08 FREQ TIME ON DLY N/A
42.09 FREQ TIME OFF DLY N/A
42.10 PFC START DELAY N/A
N/A
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
0.0 s
500 ms
NO
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
43
CTRL
SLEEP FUNCTION
43.01 SLEEP SELECTION INTERNAL INTERNAL N/A
43.02 SLEEP DELAY
43.03 SLEEP LEVEL
60.0 s
0.0 Hz
60.0 s
0.0 Hz
N/A
N/A
43.04 WAKE UP SEL MODE WAKE UP 1 WAKE UP 1 N/A
43.05 WAKE UP LEVEL
43.06 WAKE UP DELAY
43.07 SLEEP BOOST STEP 0.0%
43.08 SLEEP BOOST TIME 0.0 s
43.09 SLEEP1 SEL PTR
43.10 SLEEP2 SEL PTR
0.0%
0.0 s
0
0
44 PFC PROTECTION
44.01 INPUT PROT CTRL NOT SEL
44.02 AI MEASURE INLET NOT USED
44.03 AI IN LOW LEVEL
44.04 VERY LOW CTRL
44.05 AI IN VERY LOW
0.0%
NOT SEL
0.0%
5.0 s
3.0 s
SET 1
0 h 00 min
0.0%
0.0 s
0.0%
0.0 s
0
0
NOT SEL
0.0%
NOT SEL
0.0%
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
NOT SEL
NOT USED NOT USED
0.0%
NOT SEL
0.0%
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
NOT SEL
NOT USED
0.0%
NOT SEL
0.0%
-
PB W
901
902
903
904
906
907
908
909
910
911
951
952
953
954
955
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
890
891
892
893
894
895
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
896
897
898
-
899
900
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
230
Index Name/Selection Default setting
MULTIMASPFC TRAD HAND/AUTO LEVEL CTRL USER 1 USER 2
44.06 DI STATUS INLET
44.07 INPUT CTRL DLY
TER
NOT USED
0 s
44.08 INLET FORCED REF 0%
44.09 OUTPUT PROT NOT SEL
CTRL
44.10 AI MEASURE
OUTLET
NOT USED
44.11 AI OUT HIGH LEVEL 0.0%
NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED
0 s
0%
NOT SEL
NOT USED
0 s
0%
NOT SEL
NOT USED
0 s
0%
NOT SEL
NOT USED
44.12 VERY HIGH CTRL NOT SEL
44.13 AI OUT VERY HIGH 0%
44.14 DI STATUS OUTLET NOT USED
0.0%
NOT SEL
0%
0.0%
NOT SEL
0%
0.0%
NOT SEL
0%
NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED
44.15 OUTPUT CTRL DLY 0 s
44.16 OUTLET FORCED
REF
44.17 PI REF DEC TIME
44.18 APPL PROFILE
CTRL
0%
1.00 s
APPL
OUTPUT
44.19 PROFILE OUTP LIM 100%
44.20 PROF LIMIT ON DLY 0.0 h
44.21 PI REF FREEZE
44.22 PI OUT FREEZE
45 FLOWCONTROL
45.01 FLOW MODE
NO
NO
OFF
45.02 SUM FLOW RESET OFF
45.03 MAX INLET 0.00 bar
PRESSUR
45.04 MAX OUTLET
PRESSU
45.07 Q1
0.00 bar
0.0 m
3
/h
0 s
0%
1.00 s
APPL
OUTPUT
100%
0.0 h
NO
NO
OFF
OFF
0.00 bar
0.00 bar
0 s
0%
1.00 s
APPL
OUTPUT
100%
0.0 h
NO
NO
OFF
OFF
0.00 bar
0.00 bar
0 s
0%
1.00 s
APPL
OUTPUT
100%
0.0 h
NO
NO
OFF
OFF
0.00 bar
0.00 bar
45.08 H1
45.09 Q2
45.10 H2
45.11 Q3
45.12 H3
45.13 Q4
45.14 H4
45.15 Q5
45.16 H5
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
0.0 m
0.0 m
0.0 m
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
3
/h
/h
/h
/h
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 m
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 m
45.17 FLOW CALC MODE Q-H CURVE Q-H CURVE Q-H CURVE Q-H CURVE
45.18 Q H Q KW 0.00 m 0.00 m 0.00 m 0.00 m
BRKPOINT
45.19 DENSITY
45.20 PUMP KW1
45.21 PUMP Q1
1000.0 kg/m
3
0.0 kW
0.0 m
3
/h
1000.0 kg/m
3
0.0 kW
0.0 m
3
/h
1000.0 kg/m
3
0.0 kW
0.0 m
3
/h
1000.0 kg/m
3
0.0 kW
0.0 m
3
/h
45.22 PUMP KW2
45.23 PUMP Q2
45.24 PUMP KW3
45.25 PUMP Q3
45.26 EFFICIENCY
0.0 kW
0.0 m
1.00
3
0.0 kW
0.0 m
3
/h
/h
100.0%
45.27 PUMP NOM SPEED 1500 rpm
45.28 PUMP INLET SEL NOT SEL
45.29 PUMP OUTLET SEL NOT SEL
45.30 FLOW CALC GAIN
45.31 PUMP INLET DIAM 1.00 m
45.32 PUMP OUTLET DIAM 1.00 m
45.33 SENSOR HGT DIFF 0.00 m
0.0 kW
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 kW
0.0 m
3
/h
100.0%
1500 rpm
NOT SEL
NOT SEL
1.00
1.00 m
1.00 m
0.00 m
0.0 kW
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 kW
0.0 m
3
/h
100.0%
1500 rpm
NOT SEL
NOT SEL
1.00
1.00 m
1.00 m
0.00 m
0.0 kW
0.0 m
3
/h
0.0 kW
0.0 m
3
/h
100.0%
1500 rpm
NOT SEL
NOT SEL
1.00
1.00 m
1.00 m
0.00 m
PB W
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
976
977
978
979
-
-
-
-
-
-
994
995
996
997
998
999
-
-
1000
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
991
992
993
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
231
Index Name/Selection Default setting
MULTIMASPFC TRAD HAND/AUTO LEVEL CTRL USER 1 USER 2
TER
45.34 FLOW RESET PTR 0
46 ANTI JAM
0 0 0
46.01 A JAM ENABLE1
46.04 A JAM
FWDSTEPLEV
NOT SEL
46.02 A JAM ENABLE MF MASTER
46.03 A JAM TRIGG MODE NOT SEL
0.0%
46.05 A JAM REVSTEPLEV 0.0%
NOT SEL
N/A
NOT SEL
0.0%
0.0%
0.00 s
NOT SEL
N/A
NOT SEL
0.0%
0.0%
0.00 s
NOT SEL
MASTER
NOT SEL
0.0%
0.0%
0.00 s 46.06 A JAM FWDSTEP
TIM
0.00 s
46.07 A JAM REVSTEP TIM 0.00 s
46.08 A JAM STEP OFFTIM 0.00 s
46.09 A JAM I TRIGG LE 0.00 A
46.10 A JAM TIMETRIG LE 0.00 h
46.11 A JAM COUNT
47 LEVEL CONTROL
0
46.12 A JAM ENB1 POINT 0
47.02 PUMP DIRECTION N/A
47.03 CONTROL MODE N/A
0.00 s
0
0
0.00 s
0.00 A
0.00 h
N/A
N/A
0.00 s
0.00 s
0.00 A
0.00 h
0
0
N/A
N/A
0.00 s
0.00 s
0.00 A
0.00 h
0
0
47.04 LEVEL SOURCE SEL N/A
47.05 LOW LEVEL1
47.06 LOW LEVEL 2
47.07 STOP LEVEL
47.08 START1 LEVEL
47.09 START2 LEVEL
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
EMPTYING
COMMON
STOP
AI2
0.00%
NOT SEL
20.00%
40.00%
50.00%
47.10 START3 LEVEL
47.11 START4 LEVEL
47.12 START5 LEVEL
47.13 START6 LEVEL
47.14 START7 LEVEL
47.15 START8 LEVEL
47.16 HIGH LEVEL1
47.17 HIGH LEVEL 2
47.18 LEVEL DELAY
51 COMM MOD DATA
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
47.19 RANDOM COEF N/A
47.20 EFFICIENCY SPEED N/A
47.21 HIGH LEVEL SPEED N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
60.00%
65.00%
70.00%
75.00%
80.00%
85.00%
90.00%
NOT SEL
1.00 s
0.00%
90.00%
100.0%
-
PB W
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1026
...
52 STANDARD
MODBUS
52.01 STATION NUMBER 1
52.02 BAUDRATE 9600
52.03 PARITY
60 MASTER-
FOLLOWER
ODD
60.01 PUMP NODE 1
60.02 FOLLOWER MODE AUTO
60.03 FOLLOWER REF 50.0 Hz
60.04 AUTOCHANGE
STYLE
60.05 AUTOCHANGE
NO
3 min
INTERV
60.07 NUM PUMPS
ALLOWED
8
1
9600
ODD
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1
9600
ODD
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1
9600
ODD
1
AUTO
N/A
NO
3 min
3
1051
1052
1053
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1201
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
232
Index Name/Selection Default setting
MULTIMASPFC TRAD HAND/AUTO LEVEL CTRL USER 1 USER 2
TER
60.08 MASTER ENABLE YES
60.09 PUMP RUNTIME SEL NO
60.10 PUMP RUNTIME
60.11 PUMP RUNTIME
DIFF
0 h
1 h
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
YES
NO
0 h
1 h
60.12 PUMP CLASS SEL PAR CLASS1 N/A
60.13 PUMP CLASS 1 1 N/A
60.14 PUMP CLASS 2 1 N/A
60.17 MASTER LOSS LAST SPEED N/A
60.18 F T M COMM LOSS FOLL CTRL N/A
60.19 COMM DELAY 1.0 s N/A
60.20 ALL FOLL LOST
60.21 MIN PUMP
CONTINUE
0
60.22 INV ORDER CORR OPT
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
PAR CLASS1
1
1
LAST SPEED
FOLL CTRL
1.0 s
CONTINUE
0
OPT
CONTROL
1.0 s
1.0 s
IN STARTED
CONTROL
60.23 RAMP ACCEL TIME 1.0 s
60.24 RAMP DECEL TIME 1.0 s
N/A
N/A
60.25 MASTER LOCATION IN STARTED N/A
65 SHARE IO
65.01 SHARE IO ACTIVE NO NO
65.02 REPLACE IO
65.03 SECONDARY
SOURCE
0000000
NO
0000000
NO
N/A
N/A
N/A
NO
0000000
NO
CONTINUE CONTINUE CONTINUE 65.04 SHARE IO COM
LOST
65.05 IO COM LOST
70
DELAY
DDCS CONTROL
70.01 CH0 NODE ADDR
70.02 CH3 NODE ADDR
70.03 CH2 HW
CONNECTION
5.0 s
1
1
RING
5.0 s
1
1
RING
5.0 s
1
1
RING
NO
0000000
NO
CONTINUE
5.0 s
1
1
RING
83 ADAPT PROG
CNTRL
83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD EDIT
83.02 EDIT CMD
83.03 EDIT BLOCK
83.04 TIMELEV SEL
83.05 PASSCODE
84 ADAPTIVE
PROGRAM
NO
0
100 ms
0
84.01 STATUS
84.02 FAULTED PAR
84.05 BLOCK1
84.06 INPUT1
84.07 INPUT2
84.08 INPUT3
84.09 OUTPUT
… …
–
0
NO
0
0
0
0
EDIT
NO
0
100 ms
0
–
0
NO
0
0
0
0
EDIT
NO
0
100 ms
0
–
0
NO
0
0
0
0
EDIT
NO
0
100 ms
0
–
0
NO
0
0
0
0
0 0 0
-
-
-
PB W
1202
1203
1204
1205
-
-
-
1206
1207
1208
-
1211
1212
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1375
1376
1377
1609 W
1610
1611
1612
1613
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
-
1634
…
1644
84.79 OUTPUT
85 USER CONSTANTS
85.01 CONSTANT1
85.02 CONSTANT2
85.03 CONSTANT3
85.04 CONSTANT4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1645
1646
1647
1648
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
233
Index Name/Selection
85.05 CONSTANT5
85.06 CONSTANT6
85.07 CONSTANT7
85.08 CONSTANT8
85.09 CONSTANT9
85.10 CONSTANT10
85.11 STRING1
85.12 STRING2
TER
0
0
0
0
Default setting
MULTIMASPFC TRAD HAND/AUTO LEVEL CTRL USER 1 USER 2
0
85.13 STRING3
85.14 STRING4
85.15 STRING5
90 D SET REC ADDR
90.01 AUX DS REF3
90.02 AUX DS REF4
90.03 AUX DS REF5 0
90.04 MAIN DS SOURCE 1
90.05 AUX DS SOURCE
0
0
3
92 D SET TR ADDR
92.01 MAIN DS STATUS
WORD
302
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0 0 0
MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1
MESSAGE2 MESSAGE2 MESSAGE2 MESSAGE2
MESSAGE3 MESSAGE3 MESSAGE3 MESSAGE3
MESSAGE4 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE4
MESSAGE5 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE5
0
0
0
1
3
302
0
0
0
1
3
302
0
0
0
1
3
302
92.02 MAIN DS ACT1
92.03 MAIN DS ACT2
92.04 AUX DS ACT3
92.05 AUX DS ACT4
92.06 AUX DS ACT5
95 HARDWARE SPECIFI
102
105
305
308
306
102
105
305
308
306
102
105
305
308
306
102
105
305
308
306
95.06 LCU Q POW REF
95.07 LCU DC REF
95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL
95.09 LCU PAR2 SEL
96 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
0
0
106
110
0
0
106
110
0
0
106
110
0
0
106
110
96.01 EXT AO1 SEL
96.02 INVERT EXT AO1
FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
NO
96.03 MINIMUM EXT AO1 0 mA
NO
0 mA
NO
0 mA
NO
0 mA
96.04 FILTER EXT AO1
96.05 SCALE EXT AO1
96.06 EXT AO2 SEL
0.10 s
100%
CURRENT
0.10 s
100%
CURRENT
0.10 s
100%
CURRENT
0.10 s
100%
CURRENT
96.07 INVERT EXT AO2 NO
96.08 MINIMUM EXT AO2 0 mA
96.09 FILTER EXT AO2 2.00 s
96.10 SCALE EXT AO2
96.11 EXT AO1 PTR
96.12 EXT AO2 PTR
100%
0
0
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
98 OPTION MODULES
98.02 COMM. MODULE
LINK
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE
99 START-UP DATA
99.01 LANGUAGE
NO
98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 NO
98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 NO
NO
ENGLISH
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
98.07 COMM PROFILE ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES
98.08 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC UNIP AI5
98.09 AI/O EXT AI2 FUNC UNIP AI6
UNIP AI5
UNIP AI6
UNIP AI5
UNIP AI6
UNIP AI5
UNIP AI6
ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH
PB W
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1830
1831
1832
1833
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1902 W
1903 W
1904 W
1906 W
1907 W
1908 W
1909 W
1926 W
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
234
Index Name/Selection
VOLTAGE
99.06 MOTOR NOM
CURRENT
Default setting
MULTIMASPFC TRAD HAND/AUTO LEVEL CTRL USER 1 USER 2
99.02 APPLICATION
MACRO
TER
MULTIMAS-
TER
99.03 APPLIC RESTORE NO
99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE DTC
99.05 MOTOR NOM 0 V
0.0 A
PFC TRAD
NO
DTC
0 V
0.0 A
HAND/AUTO LEVEL CTRL
NO
DTC
0 V
0.0 A
NO
DTC
0 V
0.0 A
99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQ 50.0 Hz
99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED 1 rpm
99.09 MOTOR NOM
POWER
99.10 MOTOR ID RUN
99.11 DEVICE NAME
0.0 kW
NO
–
50.0 Hz
1 rpm
0.0 kW
NO
–
50.0 Hz
1 rpm
0.0 kW
NO
–
50.0 Hz
1 rpm
0.0 kW
NO
–
PB W
1927 W
1928 W
1929 W
1930 W
1931 W
1932 W
1933 W
1934 W
1935 W
1936
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
ABB Oy
AC Drives
P.O. Box 184
FIN-00381 HELSINKI
FINLAND
Telephone: +358 10 22 11
Fax: +358 10 22 22681
Internet: http://www.abb.com
ABB Inc.
Automation Technologies
Drives & Motors
16250 West Glendale Drive
New Berlin, WI 53151
USA
Telephone: 262 785-3200
Fax:
800-HELP-365
262 780-5135
advertisement
Key Features
- Start-up and control through the I/O interface
- Control panel operation
- Program features
- Application macros
- Actual signals and parameters
- Fault tracing
- Fieldbus control
- Analogue extension module
- Pump control application examples
- Additional data: actual signals and parameters